Body Control Module Page 12J–1

Page 12J–1

Section 12J

Body Control Module

ATTENTION

Before performing any service operation or other procedure described in this section, refer to Section 00

Warnings, Cautions and Notes for correct w orkshop practices with regard to safety and/or property damage.

1 General Information.............................................................................................................................10

1.1 Abbreviations....................................................................................................................................................... 10

1.2 Body Control Module........................................................................................................................................... 11

1.3 Body Control Module Models............................................................................................................................. 12

1.4 Body Control Module Features........................................................................................................................... 13

Feature Table Key................................................................................................................................................ 13

Feature Table........................................................................................................................................................ 13

2 System Operation.................................................................................................................................16

2.1 Body Control Module Operating Modes ............................................................................................................ 16

Battery Saver Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 16

Pre-delivery Mode................................................................................................................................................ 16

2.2 Serial Data Communication – V6........................................................................................................................ 17

System Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 17

V6 Serial Data Block Diagram.......................................................................................................................... 18

The GM LAN Bus System ................................................................................................................................ 19

UART Communications.................................................................................................................................... 19

Serial Data Bus ................................................................................................................................................ 19

Data Bus Device Polling................................................................................................................................... 20

Tech 2 and the Data Link Connector................................................................................................................ 20

Inputs and Outputs.............................................................................................................................................. 21

GM LAN Data Bus............................................................................................................................................ 21

Serial Data Signal – Primary UART.................................................................................................................. 21

Serial Data Signals – Secondary and Tertiary UART....................................................................................... 21

Data Bus Device Polling................................................................................................................................... 21

Data Messages ................................................................................................................................................ 21

Pow ertrain Interface Module............................................................................................................................... 21

2.3 Serial Data Communication – GEN III V8........................................................................................................... 22

System Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 22

GEN III V8 Serial Data Block Diagram............................................................................................................. 23

UART and Class 2 Serial Data Bus.................................................................................................................. 24

Data Bus Device Polling................................................................................................................................... 24

Tech 2 and the Data Link Connector................................................................................................................ 25

Inputs and Outputs.............................................................................................................................................. 25

Class 2 Serial Data Signal................................................................................................................................ 25

Serial Data Signal – Primary UART.................................................................................................................. 25

Serial Data Signals – Secondary and Tertiary UART....................................................................................... 25

Data Bus Device Polling................................................................................................................................... 25

Data Messages ................................................................................................................................................ 25

Pow ertrain Interface Module............................................................................................................................... 26

2.4 Remote Receiver / Key ........................................................................................................................................ 27

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 27

Unlocking.......................................................................................................................................................... 27

Locking............................................................................................................................................................. 27

Rear Compartment Lid Release....................................................................................................................... 27

Remote Coded Key Battery Failure.................................................................................................................. 27

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 28

Techline

Body Control Module Page 12J–2

Page 12J–2

2.5 Accessory Power Control ................................................................................................................................... 29

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 29

Accessory Relay Shutdown Options................................................................................................................. 29

Wiper Control of the Accessory Relay.............................................................................................................. 29

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 29

Radio On and Ignition Switch Input.................................................................................................................. 29

2.6 Central Door Locking .......................................................................................................................................... 31

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 31

Door Locking.................................................................................................................................................... 31

Door Unlocking................................................................................................................................................. 31

Deadlocking...................................................................................................................................................... 31

Single-stage and Two-stage Unlocking............................................................................................................ 32

System Check ...................................................................................................................................................... 33

Key Locking...................................................................................................................................................... 33

Remote Coded Key Check............................................................................................................................... 33

Deadlocking Check .......................................................................................................................................... 33

Door-lock Failure Warning................................................................................................................................ 33

Auto Door-lock in Drive .................................................................................................................................... 33

Overheating Prevention.................................................................................................................................... 34

Functional Description of Door Locking/Unlocking Operation........................................................................... 34

Functional Diagram of Door Locking/Unlocking Operation............................................................................... 35

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 36

Unlocking.......................................................................................................................................................... 36

Locking............................................................................................................................................................. 37

Door Input Signals............................................................................................................................................ 37

2.7 Rear Compartment Lid Release.......................................................................................................................... 38

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 38

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 38

Battery Power................................................................................................................................................... 38

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 38

Outputs............................................................................................................................................................. 39

2.8 Theft Deterrent System........................................................................................................................................ 40

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 40

V6 Engine......................................................................................................................................................... 40

GEN III V8 Engine............................................................................................................................................ 40

Battery.............................................................................................................................................................. 41

Security Status Indicator................................................................................................................................... 41

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 41

Battery Power................................................................................................................................................... 41

Turn Signal Lamp Power.................................................................................................................................. 41

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 42

Outputs............................................................................................................................................................. 42

2.9 Entry Deterrent System....................................................................................................................................... 43

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 43

Arming the System........................................................................................................................................... 43

Triggered Operation......................................................................................................................................... 43

Disarming Procedure........................................................................................................................................ 44

Multi-function Display (MFD) Trigger Point Displays ........................................................................................ 44

Remote Rear Compartment Release ............................................................................................................... 44

Loss of Vehicle Battery Power .......................................................................................................................... 44

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 45

Power Supplies ................................................................................................................................................ 45

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 45

Outputs............................................................................................................................................................. 46

2.10 Power Window System ....................................................................................................................................... 47

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 47

System Active................................................................................................................................................... 47

System Inactive................................................................................................................................................ 47

Automatic Down Operation of Front Windows.................................................................................................. 47

Lockout Switch................................................................................................................................................. 48

Body Control Module Page 12J–3

Page 12J–3

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 48

Ignition ON Input Signal ................................................................................................................................... 48

Driver and Front Passenger Window-down Circuit........................................................................................... 48

Driver and Front Passenger Window-up Circuit................................................................................................ 49

Rear Passenger Window Operation................................................................................................................. 49

2.11 Wiper System Intermittent Function .................................................................................................................. 50

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 50

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 50

Intermittent Wiper Switch.................................................................................................................................. 50

Wiper Dwell Controller...................................................................................................................................... 51

Vehicle Speed and Reverse Gear.................................................................................................................... 51

Window Washer Switch.................................................................................................................................... 51

2.12 Dome Lamp Delay Control.................................................................................................................................. 52

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 52

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 52

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 52

2.13 Automatic Lamp Control..................................................................................................................................... 54

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 54

Automatic Lights On......................................................................................................................................... 54

Automatic Lights Off......................................................................................................................................... 54

Approach Illumination....................................................................................................................................... 55

Circuit Operation – Lights On............................................................................................................................. 55

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 55

Power Supplies ................................................................................................................................................ 55

Ground Circuits ................................................................................................................................................ 56

Circuit Operation – Lights Off............................................................................................................................. 56

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 56

Power Supplies ................................................................................................................................................ 56

Ground Circuits ................................................................................................................................................ 57

2.14 Instrument Dimming Control .............................................................................................................................. 58

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 58

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 58

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 59

2.15 Occupant Protection System Deployment Vehicle Shutdown......................................................................... 60

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 60

OPS Deployment Signals................................................................................................................................. 60

2.16 Priority Key System............................................................................................................................................. 61

Operating Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 61

Parameter Checks............................................................................................................................................ 61

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 62

2.17 Pow er Antenna Control....................................................................................................................................... 63

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 63

Power Antenna................................................................................................................................................. 63

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 64

Antenna Up Switch Input Signal....................................................................................................................... 64

Antenna Up Memory Height............................................................................................................................. 64

Antenna Down.................................................................................................................................................. 64

Antenna Auto Down.......................................................................................................................................... 64

2.18 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System................................................................................................................... 65

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 65

Components Monitored.................................................................................................................................... 65

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 66

Ground Circuit Monitoring................................................................................................................................. 66

Rear Lamp Failure Warning Lamp ................................................................................................................... 66

Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 66

2.19 Hazard Lamp Control........................................................................................................................................... 67

System Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 67

Circuit Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 67

Body Control Module Page 12J–4

Page 12J–4

3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts............................................................................................68

3.1 Wiring Diagrams – V6.......................................................................................................................................... 68

Ignition Key, RX Sensor, Common Power and Grounds.................................................................................. 68

Accessory Power Circuit..................................................................................................................................... 69

UART and GM LAN Communications................................................................................................................. 70

Central Door Locking .......................................................................................................................................... 71

Entry Deterrent, Warning Horns and Rear Compartment Solenoid................................................................. 72

Power Windows................................................................................................................................................... 73

Wiper Systems Intermittent Function ................................................................................................................ 74

Dome Lamp Delay Control.................................................................................................................................. 75

Automatic Lamp Control..................................................................................................................................... 76

Pow er Antenna Control....................................................................................................................................... 77

Rear Lamp Failure System.................................................................................................................................. 78

Hazard Lamp Control, Theft / Turn Signal Lamp Flasher................................................................................. 79

3.2 Connector Charts – V6 ........................................................................................................................................ 80

3.3 Wiring Diagrams – GEN III V8 ............................................................................................................................. 84

Ignition Key, RX Sensor, Common Power and Grounds.................................................................................. 84

Accessory Power Circuit..................................................................................................................................... 85

UART and Class 2 Communications.................................................................................................................. 86

Central Door Locking .......................................................................................................................................... 87

Entry Deterrent, Warning Horns and Rear Compartment Solenoid................................................................. 88

Power Windows................................................................................................................................................... 89

Wiper Systems Intermittent Function ................................................................................................................ 90

Dome Lamp Delay Control.................................................................................................................................. 91

Automatic Lamp Control..................................................................................................................................... 92

Pow er Antenna Control....................................................................................................................................... 93

Rear Lamp Failure System.................................................................................................................................. 94

Hazard Lamp Control, Theft / Turn Signal Lamp Flasher................................................................................. 95

3.4 Connector Charts – GEN III V8............................................................................................................................ 96

3.5 Connector Information ...................................................................................................................................... 100

BCM Location and Wiring Connectors ............................................................................................................ 100

BCM Connector Pin Identification.................................................................................................................... 100

Legend – Circuit Type .................................................................................................................................... 103

Explanation of Terms ..................................................................................................................................... 103

4 Tech 2 Information .............................................................................................................................104

4.1 Connecting Tech 2 for System Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 104

4.2 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays...................................................................................................................... 105

4.3 Normal Mode...................................................................................................................................................... 106

4.4 Diagnostic Trouble Codes ................................................................................................................................ 107

Read DTC Information....................................................................................................................................... 107

Read Alarm Codes............................................................................................................................................. 107

Clear DTC and Alarm Codes ............................................................................................................................. 107

4.5 Data Display ....................................................................................................................................................... 108

Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................................................ 108

BCM Internal Status........................................................................................................................................... 110

Serial Data Inputs............................................................................................................................................... 111

Priority 1 User Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 111

Priority 2 User Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 112

Alarm / Theft Deterrent...................................................................................................................................... 112

Central Door Locking ........................................................................................................................................ 113

Power Windows................................................................................................................................................. 114

Wipers................................................................................................................................................................. 114

Headlamps.......................................................................................................................................................... 115

Instrument Illumination..................................................................................................................................... 115

Interior Illumination ........................................................................................................................................... 116

Rear Lamp Failure.............................................................................................................................................. 116

Antenna............................................................................................................................................................... 117

System Identification......................................................................................................................................... 117

4.6 Snapshot ............................................................................................................................................................ 118

Body Control Module Page 12J–5

Page 12J–5

4.7 Miscellaneous Tests.......................................................................................................................................... 119

Lamps ................................................................................................................................................................. 119

Interior Lamp.................................................................................................................................................. 119

Headlamps..................................................................................................................................................... 120

Indicators........................................................................................................................................................ 120

Instrument Illumination................................................................................................................................... 120

Auto Lights On................................................................................................................................................ 120

Rear Lamp Bulb Fail....................................................................................................................................... 121

Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Fail .............................................................................................................................. 121

Rear Lamp Fuse Fail...................................................................................................................................... 121

Data Bus Isolator ............................................................................................................................................... 122

Central Locking.................................................................................................................................................. 122

Rear Compartment............................................................................................................................................. 122

Wipers................................................................................................................................................................. 123

Front Wipers................................................................................................................................................... 123

Power Windows................................................................................................................................................. 123

Driver’s Window Auto down............................................................................................................................ 123

Front Passenger’s Window Auto down........................................................................................................... 124

Power Window Relay ..................................................................................................................................... 124

Antenna............................................................................................................................................................... 124

Horn .................................................................................................................................................................... 125

Interior Illumination Relay................................................................................................................................. 125

Accessory Relay ................................................................................................................................................ 125

Security System................................................................................................................................................. 126

Security LED .................................................................................................................................................. 126

Theft Deterrent Horn ...................................................................................................................................... 126

Key Priority..................................................................................................................................................... 126

4.8 Program.............................................................................................................................................................. 127

User Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 127

Instrument Illumination................................................................................................................................... 127

Options............................................................................................................................................................... 127

Antenna Height Memory................................................................................................................................. 128

Set Key to Priority 1........................................................................................................................................... 128

Learn BCM Settings........................................................................................................................................... 128

Program Learnt BCM Settings.......................................................................................................................... 128

4.9 Security............................................................................................................................................................... 129

BCM Link to ECM/PCM/PIM............................................................................................................................... 129

Security Information.......................................................................................................................................... 129

Program.............................................................................................................................................................. 130

5 Diagnostics.........................................................................................................................................131

5.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................ 131

5.2 Prerequisites to Diagnosis and Troubleshooting........................................................................................... 132

Preliminary System Requirements................................................................................................................... 132

Pre-delivery Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 132

Safety Requirements ......................................................................................................................................... 132

Equipment and Checking.................................................................................................................................. 132

5.3 Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions............................................................................................................... 134

Current Diagnostic Trouble Codes................................................................................................................... 134

History Diagnostic Trouble Codes................................................................................................................... 134

5.4 Description of Diagnostic Trouble Codes ....................................................................................................... 135

Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Code Fault Condition......................................................................................... 135

5.5 Intermittent Fault Conditions............................................................................................................................ 136

Description......................................................................................................................................................... 136

5.6 Diagnostic System Check................................................................................................................................. 138

Description......................................................................................................................................................... 138

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 138

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 138

5.7 Symptoms Diagnostics Table........................................................................................................................... 139

Body Control Module Page 12J–6

Page 12J–6

5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List........................................................................................................................... 140

5.9 Serial Data Communications ............................................................................................................................ 142

DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 142

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 142

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 142

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 142

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 142

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 143

5.10 Remote Receiver / Key ...................................................................................................................................... 146

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 146

Remote Coded Key Battery Failure................................................................................................................ 146

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 146

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 146

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 146

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 146

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 147

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 147

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 147

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 148

5.11 Accessory Power Control ................................................................................................................................. 149

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 149

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 149

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 149

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 149

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 150

5.12 Central Door Locking ........................................................................................................................................ 152

System Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 152

Unlocking the Doors Using the Driver’s Door Microswitch.............................................................................. 152

Locking the Doors Using the Driver’s Door Microswitch................................................................................. 152

Door Locking System Test Overview............................................................................................................... 152

Diagnostic Trouble Codes ................................................................................................................................ 153

Conditions for Setting the DTC....................................................................................................................... 153

Conditions for Clearing the DTC..................................................................................................................... 153

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 153

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 153

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 153

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 154

Unlocking the Driver’s Door Using the Door Lock Diagnostic Table............................................................ 155

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 155

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 155

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 155

Unlocking the Driver’s Door Using the Door Snib Diagnostic Table............................................................. 157

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 157

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 157

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 157

Unlocking / Locking the Front Passenger’s Doors Using the Door Snib Diagnostic Table........................ 158

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 158

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 158

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 158

Deadlocking the Vehicle’s Doors Diagnostic Table........................................................................................ 160

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 160

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 160

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 160

Auto Door Locking (Gearshift In and Out of Park Position) Diagnostic Table............................................. 161

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 161

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 161

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 161

Body Control Module Page 12J–7

Page 12J–7

Door Ajar Switches Diagnostic Table .............................................................................................................. 162

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 162

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 162

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 162

Rear Compartment Release Diagnostic Table................................................................................................. 163

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 163

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 163

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 164

5.13 Theft Deterrent System...................................................................................................................................... 166

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 166

V6 Engines..................................................................................................................................................... 166

GEN III V8 Engine.......................................................................................................................................... 166

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 167

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 167

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 167

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 167

5.14 Entry Deterrent System..................................................................................................................................... 170

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 170

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 170

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 170

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 170

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 170

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 172

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 172

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 172

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 173

Horn Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 174

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 174

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 174

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 175

5.15 Power Window System ..................................................................................................................................... 176

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 176

Introduction........................................................................................................................................................ 176

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 176

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 176

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 176

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 177

Main Power Diagnostic Table........................................................................................................................... 178

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 178

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 178

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 178

Front Window Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................... 180

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 180

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 181

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 181

Rear Windows Diagnostic Table ...................................................................................................................... 183

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 183

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 183

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 184

5.16 Wiper Systems Intermittent Function .............................................................................................................. 187

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 187

Introduction........................................................................................................................................................ 187

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 187

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 187

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 187

Intermittent Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 188

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 188

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 188

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 189

Body Control Module Page 12J–8

Page 12J–8

Road Speed Diagnostic Table........................................................................................................................... 191

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 191

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 191

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 191

5.17 Dome Lamp Delay Control................................................................................................................................ 192

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 192

Battery Saver Mode........................................................................................................................................ 192

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 193

Test Descriptions............................................................................................................................................ 193

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 193

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 193

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 194

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 194

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 195

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 195

5.18 Automatic Lamp Control................................................................................................................................... 197

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 197

Automatic Lamps Off...................................................................................................................................... 197

Automatic Lamps On...................................................................................................................................... 197

Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................... 197

Approach Illumination..................................................................................................................................... 197

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 198

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 198

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 198

Sunload Sensor Diagnostic Table.................................................................................................................... 199

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 199

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 199

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 199

Lamps On / Lamps Off Diagnostic Table......................................................................................................... 200

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 200

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 200

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 201

5.19 Instrument Dimming Control ............................................................................................................................ 203

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 203

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 203

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 203

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 203

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 204

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 204

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 204

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 204

5.20 OPS Deployment Vehicle Shutdown................................................................................................................ 205

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 205

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 205

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 205

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 205

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 205

5.21 Priority Key System........................................................................................................................................... 207

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 207

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 207

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 207

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 207

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 208

5.22 Pow er Antenna Control..................................................................................................................................... 210

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 210

Diagnostic Table................................................................................................................................................ 210

Test Description ............................................................................................................................................. 210

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 210

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 210

Body Control Module Page 12J–9

Page 12J–9

5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System................................................................................................................. 211

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 211

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 211

Test Descriptions............................................................................................................................................ 211

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 211

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 212

Test Descriptions............................................................................................................................................ 212

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 212

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 213

5.24 Hazard Lamp Control......................................................................................................................................... 215

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 215

Preliminary Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................ 215

Test Descriptions............................................................................................................................................ 215

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 215

Main Diagnostic Table....................................................................................................................................... 216

Test Descriptions............................................................................................................................................ 216

Diagnostic Table Notes .................................................................................................................................. 216

Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................................. 216

6 Service Operations.............................................................................................................................218

6.1 Body Control Module......................................................................................................................................... 218

Mounting Location............................................................................................................................................. 218

BCM Preliminary Information............................................................................................................................ 218

Remove............................................................................................................................................................... 219

Access to BCM without Disconnection........................................................................................................... 219

Removal......................................................................................................................................................... 219

Reinstall.............................................................................................................................................................. 219

Original BCM.................................................................................................................................................. 219

Replacement BCM (New)............................................................................................................................... 220

BCM Relearn Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 220

6.2 Remote Coded Key............................................................................................................................................ 221

Key Replacement............................................................................................................................................... 221

6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar Wiring Loom Connectors...................................................................... 222

A Pillar X500 and X600 Connectors.................................................................................................................. 222

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 222

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 222

B Pillar X700 and X800 Connectors.................................................................................................................. 223

Remove.......................................................................................................................................................... 223

Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................... 223

6.4 Bulb Re-learn Procedure Rear Lamp Warning Failure System...................................................................... 224

7 Torque Wrench Specifications .........................................................................................................225

8 Special Tools ......................................................................................................................................226

Body Control Module Page 12J–10

Page 12J–10

1 General Information

1.1 Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in this Section:

ABD Automatic Brake Differential

ABS Anti-lock Brakes

BCM Body Control Module

CTS Cooling Temperature Sensor

DLC Data Link Connector

ECM Engine Control Module

EBD Electronic Brake Distribution

EBL Electronic Boot Release

ECC Electronic Cruise Control

ESP Electronic Stability Program

ETC Electronic Throttle Control

FRPA Front and Rear Park Assist

HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

GMLAN General Motors Local Area Network

INS Instrument Cluster

MFD Multi-function Display

MIW Message Identifier Word

OCC Occupant Climate Control

OPS Occupant Protection System

PCM Powertrain Control Module

PIM Powertrain Interface Module

PWM Pulse Width Modulation

RF Radio Frequency

RPA Rear Park Assist

SDIL Soft Dimming Interior Lights

SDM Sensing Diagnostic Module

TCM Transmission Control Module

TCS Traction Control System

TPM Tyre Pressure Monitor

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter

VDC Vehicle Dynamic Control

VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor

Body Control Module Page 12J–11

Page 12J–11

1.2 Body Control Module

The body control module (BCM) controls various vehicle

electrical systems or features from one central module,

instead of using individual modules for each system or

feature.

The BCM is located beneath the instrument cluster to

the right of the steering column. The BCM is mounted

vertically, refer to Figure 12J – 43

The BCM fitted to the various levels of vehicle is

physically the same, but with different functions enabled

via the BCM software.

Figure 12J – 1

Disconnect and remove all vehicle modules (after

disconnecting the battery) before performing any

welding, anywhere on the vehicle. Refer to

Section 00 Warnings Cautions and Notes. Failing

to do this can cause permanent damage to the

modules.

Body Control Module Page 12J–12

Page 12J–12

1.3 Body Control Module Models

Vehicle

Levels Vehicle

Models BCM

Levels

4 Statesman Lux

5 Caprice High

Body Control Module Page 12J–13

Page 12J–13

1.4 Body Control Module Features

NOTE

Each model BCM includes a pre-delivery mode,

which sets the timer to a shorter period of

3 minutes until the vehicle has travelled above

20 km/h for a cumulative period of 30 minutes.

After this period, the battery saver timer sets to

1 hour.

The following list provides a summary of the features available on all level BCM’s.

• Remote deadlocking via remote key, two LOCK switch presses within 10 seconds.

• Battery saver feature; turns off all internal lamps after 1 hour (default setting) of the ignition being switched off.

• Key off courtesy lamp; courtesy lamp comes on for 30 seconds when the ignition is switched off.

• Disablement of the in-vehicle rear compartment release switch when the security system is armed.

• Approach illumination entry, headlamps and / or park lamps are turned on for 30 seconds (dependent on headlamp

switch position) when the vehicle is unlocked via the remote key.

Feature Table Key

Feature available 9

Feature not available X

Feature selectable by user U

Feature Table

Feature Function Description

Lux

High

Accessory power control

(delay accessories bus) Power to the audio system, windscreen wiper and other

accessories is removed when the ignition is switched off. 9 9

Airbag deployment vehicle shutdown Upon airbag deployment, the doors unlock and the dome lamp

illuminates for 10 seconds after the vehicle stops. Engine and

fuel pump turned off.

9 9

Approach

illumination Operates during darkened

conditions. The headlamps illuminate for 30 seconds when the remote key

unlocks the doors in low light conditions. 9 9

Automatic

door-locking Selectable from instrument

cluster menu. All doors lock automatically when the gearshift lever is moved

out of the Park position. U U

Automatic

lights off Turns off exterior lights

after a set period. With the park lamps, headlamps or auto lamps on, the selected

lamps remain on after key off for a user adjustable period

before switching off automatically.

9 9

Automatic

lights on Turns lights on and off

automatically. The sun sensor automatically determines when to turn on or off

the headlamps according to light conditions. The wiper switch

position can force the lights to come on earlier than normal.

9 9

Reduced standing current. After the vehicle has entered Battery Saver mode, the battery

current reduces to less than 30 mA. The time to invoke this

mode is 10 seconds after remote lock, key lock via driver’s

door or 1 hour after the ignition has been switched off.

9 9

Battery saver

Pre-delivery 3-minute

cutout. This mode exists on the vehicle until it has travelled a total of

30 minutes at speeds above 20 km/h. 9 9

Body Control Module Page 12J–14

Page 12J–14

Feature Function Description

Lux

High

Central

locking –

keyless entry

• Selectable whether

remote entry

operates driver only

or both doors.

• Engages door

deadlocks when

LOCK key button is

pressed twice.

• Releases both door

deadlocks when

unlocking vehicle.

• Operates exterior

lamps to show

location of car at

night.

• Enables or disables

the alarm system.

• Remote rear

compartment lid

release in glove box

disabled when

vehicle is locked.

• Applies a rolling

security code for

increased security.

• Horn chirps if either

door is ajar when

remote locking is

initiated.

Pressing the LOCK / UNLOCK key button down will lock /

unlock all doors simultaneously.

Separate driver’s door only unlock, called “2 stage unlock” is

selectable from the instrument cluster menu. If single stage

unlock is selected all door will unlock when UNLOCK button is

pressed.

A second press of the LOCK button within the required time

activates each door deadlock.

9 9

Central Locking – remote rear

compartment release. A separate button on the key releases the rear compartment. 9 9

Dome and

courtesy

lamp control

Entry delay, central locking

and ignition off courtesy

illumination.

The dome lamp is switched on from various sources. Lamp

shut-off timing is triggered by ignition key switch off and the

driver’s door being opened and closed.

9 9

Entry

deterrent

system

Vehicle immobilisation and

entry alarm. A range of security features provides the highest level of

security to the vehicle. 9 9

Instrument dimming control Holding the dimming switch in either the Increase or decrease

position changes instrumentation illumination. 9 9

Intermittent

wiper control Road speed dependent

variable dwell options. The intermittent wiper dwell time reduces as the vehicle speed

increases. 9 9

Power

window

system

• Controls the vehicles

power windows

automatic functions.

• With driver and

passenger express

down.

• Windows remain

operative for a short

period after ignition is

switched off.

The express down feature operates when the power window

switches are held down for more than 0.4 second. 9 9

Power

antenna

control

With height adjustment and

height memory. The radio antenna is height and drive direction is controlled by

the BCM when it receives a radio request signal. The height

can be set and stored for Priority 1 and 2 keys.

9 9

Body Control Module Page 12J–15

Page 12J–15

Feature Function Description

Lux

High

Priority key

automatically

applies

personalised

vehicle

settings for

2 people

The BCM stores individual

settings for the following:

• Climate control,

• Sound system,

• Trip computer,

• Overspeed alert,

• Transmission power–

economy mode,

• Instrument dimmer

level,

• Headlamps off time

delay,

• Accessories

shutdown control via

driver’s door opening

or ignition off,

• Dome lamp and

courtesy lamp timers,

• Single stage and two

stage unlock,

• Horn chirp when

LOCK and UNLOCK

button press,

• Speed dependant

wipers,

• Automatic lights on

setting (Early, Normal

and Late), and

• Memory seats.

Putting either Key 1 or 2 in the ignition switch selects the

choices made in the systems listed. 9 9

Rear bulb

failure

indication

Checks for both tail and

brake lamp fuse and lamp

failure.

A failure message appears on the MFD when there is a fault in

the brake or rear lamp circuits. X 9

With speed interlock. The rear compartment cannot be released at speeds over

20 km/h. 9 9

Rear

compartment

release Disabled when armed. Rear compartment lid opening (by pressing the switch in the

glove box) is disabled when the theft deterrent system is

armed, using the remote coded key and doors locked via door

lock barrel.

9 9

Serial data interface The vehicle contains control modules that communicate via a

serial data system. This permits Tech 2 interaction to enable

high-level diagnostic fault analysis.

9 9

Theft deterrent Engine is disabled to immobilise vehicle when the key is

removed from the ignition. This will occur 30 seconds after

ignition off and is indicated by the theft deterrent LED on the

instrument cluster flashing.

9 9

Body Control Module Page 12J–16

Page 12J–16

2 System Operation

2.1 Body Control Module Operating Modes

Battery Saver Mode

The BCM battery saver mode provides vehicle battery protection through reduced current consumption. After a preset

delay period controlled by the BCM’s internal shut down timer, the BCM:

• De-energises the interior illumination relay, which supplies battery voltage to all interior lamps including the dome

lamp, ignition lock, instrument panel compartment and rear compartment lamps. This protects the battery when:

• A lamp is mistakenly left on because a door is left open, or

• A faulty illumination circuit or component is causing excess current consumption.

• De-energises the power window relay. This action is separate from the normal Power Window Off Delay function.

• Disables the BCM inputs normally not required when the ignition is off.

• De-energises the accessories relay.

The battery saver delay period has a default value of 60 minutes, however it can be set from 3 – 180 minutes using

Tech 2. The delay period starts when the ignition is switched off.

If the BCM is in battery saver mode, all the BCM inputs are re-enabled when:

• The hood, rear compartment lid or any door is opened,

• The BCM receives a valid RF key lock, unlock or rear compartment signal from the remote coded key,

• The ignition switch is turned on or to the accessories position,

• The doors are unlocked via the driver’s door microswitch,

• The deadlock switch is operated,

• Tech 2 is communicating with the BCM,

• The headlamp switch is cycled from off to on or from on to off,

• The rear compartment release switch, located in the glove box, is operated,

• The alarm is activated (if fitted),

• Hazard switch on, or

• Accessories on via radio trigger.

Pre-delivery Mode

To provide additional battery protection the vehicle is delivered with the BCM in pre-delivery mode. In this mode, the

battery saver period is set to 3 minutes.

Pre-delivery mode is disabled once the vehicle has travelled for a total of 30 minutes at speeds above 20 km/h. This

value is estimated to be the equivalent period prior to customer delivery.

Pre-delivery mode may also be enabled and disabled using Tech 2.

Body Control Module Page 12J–17

Page 12J–17

2.2 Serial Data Communication – V6

System Overview

Vehicles that are fitted with a HFV6 engine use GM LAN (General Motors Local Area Network) serial data

communications system for powertrain components. The modules use GM LAN communications to transfer information

between each other and bi directionally to the powertrain interface module (PIM). GM LAN has a major advantage over

the former Class 2 system of data communication in that it transfers data much faster.

Refer to the system block diagram Figure 12J – 2 showing how the control modules within the vehicle are connected to

the BCM via the GM LAN and UART (Bus Master) systems.

Body Control Module Page 12J–18

Page 12J–18

V6 Serial Data Block Diagram

NOTE

Serial Data Components shown in the block

diagram will vary depending on vehicle options.

Figure 12J – 2

Legend

1 Body Control Module (BCM)

2 Powertrain Interface Module (PIM)

3 Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)

4 ABS-TCS / ESP Electronic Control Unit (ECU)

5 Engine Control Module (ECM)

6 Transmission Control Module (TCM)

7 Audio Head Unit (AHU)

8 Memory Seat Module (MSM)

9 Telematics Module

10 Instrument Cluster

11 Occupant Protection System Sensing and Diagnostic

Module (SDM)

12 Data Link Connector

13 Tech 2 Diagnostic Tool

A GM LAN serial data circuit

B Primary UART serial data circuit

C Secondary UART serial data circuit

D Tertiary UART serial data circuit

Body Control Module Page 12J–19

Page 12J–19

The GM LAN Bus System

The term GM LAN means the various engine and vehicle control modules are linked together on a common twisted pair

bi directional data bus.

The advantages of using GM LAN are:

• Fewer sensors and signal wires are necessary due to the multiple uses of common sensor signals.

• Fewer wires are needed in the cable harnesses.

• Smaller wiring harnesses results in an overall vehicle weight reduction.

• Fewer plug-in terminals are required in the control unit connectors.

• Improved reliability and serviceability is achieved.

The GM LAN bus system communicates between the ECM, TCM, ABS / TCS and PIM via a dual wire network, which is a

high-speed differential bus with a transmission speed of 500K bits / second. It is designed as a dual wire system

comprising one tan / black wire (CAN-High) and another tan wire (CAN-Low). The wires are twisted together to prevent

electro-magnetic interference being caused to other control units within the vehicle. The twisting of these wires eliminates

any magnetic fields that are created by the rapid voltage changes on the lines.

GM LAN module’s have various vehicle peripheral devices such as sensors and switches connected to them. The

module either reads data from these peripheral devices, or sends commands to them. The timing as to when data is read

from or sent to it is most often determined by either engine or vehicle operating conditions, which is received from other

control modules connected to the GM LAN.

Data transmitted from any module is sent to all GM LAN control modules connected to the bus. Each control module has

to assess whether the data it receives is required for it to process and if necessary, to act upon it.

UART Communications

Tech 2 and the vehicle system body control modules communicate with and between each other using serial data. Serial

data transfers information, one bit at a time, over a single line called the UART data bus.

The UART bus is a 5-volt data line that toggles the voltage to ground (0 V) at a fixed bit pulse-width during

communication and transmits data at the frequency of 8.2 kilobits per second (8192 bits/second) to all modules

connected to it. When there is no communication on the data line, the system voltage remains constant at 5 V.

Serial Data Bus

The serial data bus is divided into three sections, these being:

• Primary data bus.

The BCM uses the primary data bus, circuit 800, for communication with the Powertrain Interface Module (PIM) A5.

• Secondary data bus.

The BCM uses the secondary data bus, circuit 1061 for communication with the remaining modules, except the

OPS / SDM module A65.

• Tertiary data bus.

The BCM uses the tertiary data bus, circuit 774, for communication with the Occupant Protection System OPS /

SDM A65.

Body Control Module Page 12J–20

Page 12J–20

Data Bus Device Polling

The BCM periodically polls (surveys) each device on the Primary, Secondary and Tertiary data buses, which includes the

BCM itself, and requests each module’s status data. The following devices and control modules are polled:

Primary Serial Data Bus

• PIM (A5).

• Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool.

Secondary Serial Data Bus

• instrument cluster (P3).

• audio head unit (A133)

• memory seat module (A21)

• telematics module (A158)

• HVAC (A14)

• tyre pressure monitor (A157)

• amplifier (N7)

• audio interface module (A156)

Tertiary Serial Data Bus

• occupant protection system (OPS) and sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) A65.

The BCM polls each of the above listed devices for a status update every 300 milliseconds with the exception of the PIM

and radio, which are polled twice every 300 milliseconds. An internal, software controlled switch (within the BCM) can

isolate the secondary data bus and the tertiary data bus from the primary data bus if a short circuit appears on either the

secondary or tertiary data buses. When this switch is opened by the BCM, this permits the vehicle to start and run for

short distances with limited facilities available to the driver such as instrumentation, radio, etc.

Tech 2 and the Data Link Connector

The DLC provides an interface between Tech 2 and the two data bus systems. The X40 Data Link Connector (DLC)

provides the facility for Tech 2 to communicate to the vehicle’s control modules via the GM LAN and Bus Master UART

systems.

Tech 2 communicates with the ECM and other powertrain control modules via its own direct connection to the GM LAN

via the DLC. It also communicates with the BCM via the DLC’s Primary UART Bus.

Body Control Module Page 12J–21

Page 12J–21

Inputs and Outputs

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

GM LAN Data Bus

The GM LAN twisted pair data bus is connected to CAN_LO and CAN_HI between the PIM and the ECU, ABS / TCS,

TCM and the SAS control modules. The GM LAN data bus is also available at the data link connector (DLC)

Serial Data Signal – Primary UART

The BCM Primary Serial Data bus A15 – X2 pin 5 is connected to the PIM A5 – X1 pin 10 and the data link connector

(DLC) to Tech 2 via circuit 800. It is through the Primary UART Bus the BCM communicates with the PIM and with

Tech 2 when it is connected to the DLC.

Serial Data Signals – Secondary and Tertiary UART

The BCM secondary serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 9 is connected to the instrument cluster (P3), the audio head

unit (A133), the memory seat module (A21) the telematics module (A158) the HVAC module (A14) the tyre pressure

monitor (A157) the amplifier module (N7) and the audio interface module (A156) via circuit 1061.

The BCM tertiary serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 6 is connected to the OPS / SDM module (A65) via circuit 774. It is

through circuits 1061 and 774 the BCM communicates with these devices after successful theft deterrent

communications has occurred between the PIM and BCM.

The secondary and tertiary serial data buses are isolated from the primary serial data bus within the BCM if the BCM

does not receive an OK To Start message from the PIM within 0.5 second of the ignition being switched to the ON

position. If there is still no acknowledgment from the PIM after this time, this isolation continues for a 5 second period

before the BCM re-commences polling.

Data Bus Device Polling

The BCM controls all modules on the UART serial data communication system. The BCM periodically polls (surveys)

each device on the data bus, including the BCM itself, and requests status data. The following devices and control

modules are polled:

• powertrain interface module (PIM),

• instrument cluster,

• occupant protection system (OPS) sensing and diagnostic module (SDM),

• blower motor and A/C compressor module (HVAC),

• audio system head unit (AHU),

• memory seat module (MSM),

• Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool, and

• the BCM itself.

The BCM polls each device for a status update every 300 milliseconds, with the exception of the PIM and radio which are

polled twice every 300 milliseconds.

Data Messages

Any device connected to the bus can use the data provided by each device.

Each device has a unique response message identifier word (MIW) for ease of identification. The BCM polls each device

with a serial data message that includes the device MIW. The device responds with a serial data message including its

MIW with the data, which is retrieved and used by any device requiring it.

Powertrain Interface Module

The powertrain interface module (PIM) is the hardware and serial communications interface between the engine ECM

and powertrain, braking, traction control and steering control modules that are connected to the GM LAN data bus. The

PIM acts as a transparent bi-directional translation device that allows data to flow between the above modules on the

GM LAN data bus and converts this data to UART serial data protocols for the BCM to process and act on.

Refer to Section 6E1 Powertrain Interface Module – V6 for further detailed information.

Body Control Module Page 12J–22

Page 12J–22

2.3 Serial Data Communication – GEN III V8

System Overview

GEN III V8 vehicles use both the UART bus master system to communicate between the BCM and various body modules

and Class 2 communications to communicate between the powertrain interface module (PIM) and the powertrain control

module (PCM).

Class 2 uses a different communications language to UART, therefore direct communication between the modules is

incompatible and requires an interface module PIM to convert Class 2 communication into UART and UART into Class 2.

Refer to Section 6E3 Powertrain Interface Module GEN III V8 for further details.

Refer to the system block diagram Figure 12J – 3 showing how the control modules within the vehicle are connected to

the BCM via the Class 2 and UART (Bus Master) systems.

Body Control Module Page 12J–23

Page 12J–23

GEN III V8 Serial Data Block Diagram

NOTE

Serial Data Components shown in the block

diagram will vary depending on vehicle options.

Figure 12J – 3

Legend

1 Body Control Module (BCM)

2 Powertrain Interface Module (PIM)

3 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

4 Audio Head Unit (AHU)

5 Memory Seat Module (MSM)

6 Telematics Module

7 Instrument Cluster

8 Antilock Brake System (ABS)

9 Occupant Protection System Sensing and Diagnostic

Module (SDM)

10 Data Link Connector

11 Tech 2 Diagnostic Tool

A Class 2 data circuit

B Primary UART serial data circuit

C Secondary UART serial data circuit

D Tertiary UART serial data circuit

Body Control Module Page 12J–24

Page 12J–24

UART and Class 2 Serial Data Bus

Tech 2 and the vehicle system control modules communicate with and between each other using serial data. Serial data

transfers information, one bit at a time, over a single line called the universal asynchronous receive and transmit UART

data bus. UART is a communications protocol that has a master module, which controls the message traffic on the serial

data bus. The body control module is the UART bus master.

The UART bus is a 5-volt data line that toggles the voltage to ground (0 V) at a fixed bit pulse-width during

communication and transmits data at the frequency of 8.2 kilobits per second (8192 bits/second) to all modules

connected to it. When there is no communication on the data line, the system voltage remains constant at 5 V.

The PIM communicates with the PCM using Class 2 data communications. This type of communications toggles the data

line from 0 V to 7 V with either a short or long pulse width at an average frequency of 10.4 kilobits per second. In Class 2

communications, where there is no communications on the data line, the system voltage is 0 V. Class 2 communication

protocol enables communications directly between the modules on the bus without the need for a bus master.

The serial data bus is divided into three sections, these being:

• Primary data bus.

The BCM uses the primary data bus, circuit 800, for communication with the powertrain interface module PIM A5.

• Secondary data bus.

The BCM uses the secondary data bus, circuit 1061 for communication with the remaining modules, except the

OPS / SDM module A65.

• Tertiary data bus.

The BCM uses the tertiary data bus, circuit 774, for communication with the occupant protection system OPS /

SDM A65.

Data Bus Device Polling

The BCM periodically polls (surveys) each device on the primary, secondary and tertiary data buses, which includes the

BCM itself, and requests each module’s status data. The following devices and control modules are polled:

Primary Serial Data Bus

• PIM (A5).

• Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool.

Secondary Serial Data Bus

• instrument cluster (P3).

• audio head unit (A133)

• memory seat module (A21)

• telematics module (A158)

• HVAC (A14)

• tyre pressure monitor (A157)

• amplifier (N7)

• audio interface module (A156)

Tertiary Serial Data Bus

• occupant protection system (OPS) and sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) A65.

The BCM polls each of the above listed devices for a status update every 300 milliseconds with the exception of the PIM

and radio, which are polled twice every 300 milliseconds. An internal, software controlled switch (within the BCM) can

isolate the secondary data bus and the tertiary data bus from the primary data bus if a short circuit appears on either the

secondary or tertiary data buses. When this switch is opened by the BCM, this permits the vehicle to start and run for

short distances with limited facilities available to the driver such as instrumentation, radio, etc.

Body Control Module Page 12J–25

Page 12J–25

Tech 2 and the Data Link Connector

The DLC provides an interface between Tech 2 and the two data bus systems. The X40 Data Link Connector (DLC)

provides the facility for Tech 2 to communicate to the vehicle’s control modules via the GM LAN and Bus Master

systems.

Tech 2 communicates with the BCM via the DLC’s primary UART bus as well as the receiving bi-directional Class 2 data

communications from the PIM and PCM. Tech 2 is able to communicate with both UART and Class 2 control modules.

Inputs and Outputs

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

Class 2 Serial Data Signal

Class 2 serial data flows bi-directional between the PIM A5 – X1 pin 7 and the PCM A84 – X1 pin 58 and is also present

at the data link connector (DLC) to Tech 2 via circuit 1045.

Serial Data Signal – Primary UART

The BCM primary serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 5, is connected to the PIM A5 – X1 pin 6 and the data link connector

(DLC) to Tech 2 via circuit 800. It is through the primary UART Bus the BCM communicates with the PIM and with Tech 2

when it is connected to the DLC.

Serial Data Signals – Secondary and Tertiary UART

The BCM secondary serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 9, is connected to the instrument cluster (P3), the audio head

unit (A133), the memory seat module (A21) the telematics module (A158) the HVAC (A14) the tyre pressure monitor

(A157) the amplifier module (N7) and the audio interface module (A156) via circuit 1061.

The BCM tertiary serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 6 is connected to the OPS / SDM module (A65) via circuit 774. It is

through circuits 1061 and 774 the BCM communicates with these devices after successful theft deterrent

communications has occurred between the PIM and BCM.

The secondary and tertiary serial data buses are isolated from the primary serial data bus within the BCM if the BCM

does not receive an OK To Start message from the PIM within 0.5 second of the ignition being switched to the ON

position. If there is still no acknowledgment from the PIM after this time, this isolation continues for a 5 second period

before the BCM re-commences polling.

Data Bus Device Polling

The BCM controls all modules on the UART serial data communication system. The BCM periodically polls (surveys)

each device on the data bus, including the BCM itself, and requests status data. The following devices and control

modules are polled:

• powertrain interface module (PIM),

• instrument cluster,

• antilock brake / traction control system (ABS/TCS) module,

• occupant protection system (OPS) sensing and diagnostic module (SDM),

• blower motor and A/C compressor module (HVAC),

• audio system head unit (AHU),

• memory seat module (MSM),

• Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool, and

• the BCM itself.

The BCM polls each device for a status update every 300 milliseconds, with the exception of the PIM and radio which are

polled twice every 300 milliseconds.

Data Messages

Any device connected to the bus can use the data provided by each device.

Each device has a unique response message identifier word (MIW) for ease of identification. The BCM polls each device

with a serial data message that includes the device MIW. The device responds with a serial data message including its

MIW with the data, which is retrieved and used by any device requiring it.

When the ignition is off, the BCM continues to poll, allowing for Tech 2 communications and external control of the bus

prior to the ignition being switched on.

Body Control Module Page 12J–26

Page 12J–26

Powertrain Interface Module

The powertrain interface module (PIM) is the hardware and serial communications interface between the powertrain

control module (PCM) connected together via the Class 2 data bus. The PIM acts as a transparent bi-directional

translation device that allows data to flow between the PCM and converts this data to UART serial data protocols for the

BCM to process and act on.

Refer to Section 6E3 Powertrain Interface Module – GEN III V8 for further detailed information.

Body Control Module Page 12J–27

Page 12J–27

2.4 Remote Receiver / Key

System Operation

Unlocking

When operating the UNLOCK button (1) on the remote

coded key, a radio signal radiates from the key. If the

UNLOCK button is operated for 0.25 second within

approximately 4 metres of the driver’s side B-pillar, the BCM

receives an Unlock Request signal from the remote key

receiver, which is located in the instrument panel between

the demist ducts.

The BCM then:

• Unlocks all the doors (single-stage unlock) or the

driver’s door only (two-stage unlock),

• Disarms the theft and entry deterrent systems,

• Turns on the dome lamp in low light level conditions,

• Flashes the turn signal lamps twice,

• Horn chirps twice if selected, and

• Turns on headlamps (if headlamps are not in the off

position).

Figure 12J – 4

Locking

When operating the LOCK button (2) on the remote coded key for 0.25 second within approximately 4 metres of the

driver’s side B-pillar, a Lock Request signal is received by the BCM via the remote receiver.

The BCM then:

• Locks all the doors,

• Arms the theft and entry deterrent systems,

• Turns the dome lamp off if it is illuminated,

• Flashes the turn signal lamps once, and

• Horn chirps once if selected

NOTE

The vehicle cannot be locked if any front door is

open or ajar.

Rear Compartment Lid Release

When operating the rear compartment lid release button (3) on the remote coded key for 0.5 second within approximately

2 metres of the rear compartment lid, the BCM checks the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h before activating the rear

compartment lock actuator to release the lid.

Remote Coded Key Battery Failure

The remote coded key is powered by it’s own internal battery. If this battery fails, no RF signal is transmitted when

operating the lock, unlock and rear compartment release buttons. However, the remote coded key reader has the ability

to power the key when the key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned on, or to the start position. This enables theft

deterrent disarming.

Body Control Module Page 12J–28

Page 12J–28

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

When operating the remote coded key, an RF signal is transmitted to the remote key receiver. This receiver transfers the

received data from receiver B55 – X1 pin 2 to A15 – X2 pin 1, via circuit 218. The receiver ground connection is from

receiver B55 – X1 pin 7 to A15 – X1 pin 14, circuit 219. The BCM responds to the received signal based on the frequency

of the RF signal (the button on the key that is pressed).

NOTE

The remote key receiver is also referred as the

sensor assembly headlamp auto control

assembly (B55) due to the incorporated light level

monitoring function.

Body Control Module Page 12J–29

Page 12J–29

2.5 Accessory Power Control

System Operation

The coil of the accessory control relay is switched to ground by the BCM when the ignition is turned to either the ACC or

ON positions. When the relay is energised, power is supplied to the radio, windscreen wiper systems and other

accessories, if fitted.

NOTE

The accessory relay will remain off when the

ignition switch is in the OFF position.

Accessory Relay Shutdown Options

The accessory relay can be triggered to remove battery power to the accessories by either:

• Switching the ignition switch to the OFF position, or

• Opening the driver’s door.

The driver’s choice of what action affects the relay can be selected through the instrument cluster’s MFD or using Tech 2.

The default option is set to Door Open.

However, if the accessory power relay had removed power and the radio is switched on, the BCM will energise the

accessory control relay for an additional period of 63 minutes. If the radio is switched off during this time frame, the

accessory control relay will be switched off immediately.

Wiper Control of the Accessory Relay

If the intermittent wiper system is in operation when the BCM is ready to disable the accessory relay, the relay can only

be disabled when the wiper park signal has been sensed by the BCM. If this signal is not sensed within 3 seconds of a

door shutting or the ignition being switched off, the BCM will automatically disable the relay.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Radio On and Ignition Switch Input

When the ignition switch is turned to either the ACC or the ON positions, a 12 V supply from the ignition switch is

detected by the BCM at either A15 – X3 pin 4, (accessories request via circuit 4), or A15 – X3 pin 2 (ignition request via

circuit 300).

When either of these ignition switch positions is selected, the BCM then provides a ground connection to the accessory

control relay at A15 – X1 pin 9 via circuit 755. This causes its relay contacts to close, supplying 12 V to the BCM

accessory circuits, including:

• The front wipers, circuit 243, via fuse F18,

• The rear wiper system, also circuit 243, via fuse F18,

• The radio and, circuit 43, and

• The accessory socket, circuit 143.

Body Control Module Page 12J–30

Page 12J–30

Radio

If the radio is switched on while the ignition switch remains in the off position, the BCM will detect a radio request signal

with 12 V appearing at A15 – X3 pin 10 from circuit 314. The BCM will then energise the accessory control relay for 63

minutes while monitoring for other radio switch activations to occur, which will reset the 63-minute timer back to

63 minutes.

Depending on the option selected in which to disable the accessories control relay, the BCM will disable it when 0 V is

detected at BCM A15 – X3 pin 4 (accessories request via circuit 4) is no longer valid, or when 0 V is detected at A15 –

X4 pin 19 when the driver’s door is opened circuit 746.

Wipers

If the front wiper is in operation after initiating the disabling of the accessory power, the BCM will continue to monitor the

operation of the wiper park switch at BCM input A15 – X1 pin 1 through circuit 196. When 12 V is detected, the accessory

control relay is then disabled. If the wiper park signal is not detected within 3 seconds, the BCM will automatically disable

the relay.

Body Control Module Page 12J–31

Page 12J–31

2.6 Central Door Locking

System Operation

The central door locking system provides for locking or unlocking of all doors enhanced locking or deadlocking of the

doors as well as single-stage and two-stage unlocking.

With all vehicles, it is possible to deadlock the doors via the remote coded key.

Reversible motors controlled by BCM relays operate the door locks. These relays apply battery voltage to one side of

each motor and ground to the other side.

The central door locking system has five operational phases:

• Lock to unlock,

• Deadlock to unlock,

• Unlock to lock,

• Lock to deadlock, and

• Deadlock to lock.

Door Locking

The following triggers are used to activate this system:

• The driver's door-lock actuator, which is mechanically linked to the interior door snib and the door latch.

• The front passenger’s door-lock actuator, which is mechanically linked to the interior snib button.

• The microswitches in the driver’s door key barrel, which are also mechanically linked to the door latch and

therefore, to the actuators.

• The LOCK button on the remote coded key when all the doors are closed.

Door Unlocking

The following triggers are used to activate the system:

• Any door-lock actuator (snib) being pulled upwards.

• The microswitch in the driver’s door key barrel operating when the key is rotated.

• The UNLOCK button being pressed on the remote coded key.

If the battery becomes completely discharged, unlocking of the driver’s door latch is still possible by placing the key in the

door lock and rotating it. This action will still open the driver’s door if the door lock actuator (snib) is held down.

Deadlocking

Deadlocking provides for mechanical jamming of the door-lock actuators. The deadlocking feature applies to all four

doors, but not to the rear compartment lid. This is achieved electrically using the driver’s door lock microswitch or by an

RF signal from the remote key.

Deadlocking is engaged by two sequential operations of the door-lock microswitch or pressing the lock button on the

remote coded key twice within 10 seconds.

If the remote coded key is used, the turn signal lamps illuminate for three seconds when deadlocking is successful.

If the vehicle is already deadlocked, pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key causes the turn signal lamps to

illuminate for 3 seconds. This indicates the vehicle is already deadlocked.

If the vehicle is locked but not deadlocked, pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key over ten seconds after

the previous press does not deadlock the doors and the turn signal lamps will flash briefly. This indicates the doors are

only locked. Pressing the LOCK button again within a 10 second period deadlocks the doors and the turn signal lamps

illuminate for 3 seconds.

If the deadlocking operation is not fully successful, a brief warning chirp will sound.

Body Control Module Page 12J–32

Page 12J–32

After deadlocking, outside unlocking at the driver’s door is achieved by turning the key in the driver’s door-lock to the

unlock position or pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key. If two-stage unlocking is enabled, pressing the

remote coded key button removes the deadlock on all doors, but only unlocks the driver’s door.

If the electrical system fails after the system has been engaged, the driver’s door-lock cylinder can be moved

independently of the actuator. This allows unlocking of the driver’s door latch.

The rear compartment lid can be locked or unlocked when mechanical deadlocking is actuated, leaving the doors

secured.

NOTE

Central locking and deadlocking is not possible

when the ignition is on.

Single-stage and Two-stage Unlocking

The BCM is capable of operating in either single-stage unlock or two-stage unlock mode.

With Tech 2, the BCM can be programmed to operate in either two-stage or single-stage unlock, depending on the

vehicle’s owner or operator requirements. This can also be programmed via the instrument cluster MFD.

If a faulty circuit exists on either the lock or unlock signal inputs, the opposing input is still able to perform its function.

This enables the doors to be unlocked when a faulty circuit exists on the lock input or vice versa.

If the lock / unlock system is operated several times in a defined time period, the system times out. After a fixed time

delay, the system re-activates as normal. This action is to protect the door-locking actuator motors.

NOTE

Central locking and deadlocking is inhibited while

the ignition is switched on. The Theft Deterrent

System also affects operation of this system.

Refer to 2.8 Theft Deterrent System.

Single-stage Unlock

In single-stage unlock mode, when the remote coded key UNLOCK button is pressed for 0.25 seconds or longer, the

BCM unlocks all doors simultaneously.

Two-stage Unlock

This mode can be enabled or disabled by the customer, refer to Section 12C Instrumentation.

In the two-stage unlock mode, pressing the remote coded key UNLOCK button for 0.25 seconds sends a signal to the

remote receiver. When the BCM receives the unlock request from the remote receiver, it unlocks the driver’s door only. If

the remote coded key unlock button is pressed again for 0.25 seconds, the BCM unlocks all passenger doors.

If the remote coded key is pressed continuously for 0.5 seconds, the BCM unlocks all doors; first, the driver’s door, then

all passenger doors.

Body Control Module Page 12J–33

Page 12J–33

System Check

Key Locking

Figure 12J – 5 shows the key positions on the driver’s door

for the various key-locking functions. One lock operation to

position A locks the vehicle. Two lock operations to

position A deadlocks the vehicle. One operation to position

B unlocks the vehicle.

Deadlocking means securing the vehicle by

electro-mechanically inhibiting door-lock snib operation.

Even though the electronic theft deterrent system (using

the remote coded key) can activate the door-locks, it does

not automatically deadlock the doors.

Figure 12J – 5

Remote Coded Key Check

Check the remote coded key locks all doors when the key

LOCK button is pressed within approximately 4 metres of

the driver’s side B-pillar.

If the vehicle is programmed for two-stage unlock, the

driver's side door unlocks, the passenger doors

undeadlock when the key UNLOCK button is pressed.

Pressing the UNLOCK button again unlocks all the

passenger doors.

If the vehicle is programmed for single-stage unlock, a

single press of the unlock button unlocks all doors.

If this check is not satisfactory, refer to 5.10 Remote

Receiver / Key. for a more detailed diagnosis before

continuing with the central locking system check.

Figure 12J – 6

Deadlocking Check

1 Open all windows.

2 Close all doors.

3 Use the key to operate the deadlock from the driver’s door.

4 Check that all door snibs are locked in position and cannot be pulled up.

NOTE

The snib buttons can be pulled up slightly, but

they will be under tension.

Door-lock Failure Warning

If a door fails to lock due to a mechanical or electrical fault, the system alerts the driver by giving a five short horn chirps

and the turn signal lamps do not flash when the remote lock button is pressed.

Auto Door-lock in Drive

NOTE

This is only applicable for vehicles fitted with

automatic transmission.

This feature applies only to automatic transmission vehicles and can be enabled or disabled by the customer. Refer to

Section 12C Instrumentation.

The BCM provides automatic locking of the doors when the ignition is on and the gearshift lever is moved out of the P

(park) position. The gearshift transition is detected by the BCM via the serial data bus.

The door-locks will unlock when the ignition is off and the gearshift lever is moved into the P (park) position.

Body Control Module Page 12J–34

Page 12J–34

NOTE

Only the driver’s door unlocks if two-stage unlock

is enabled.

NOTE

Auto door locking is inhibited while any door is

open.

Overheating Prevention

If there are multiple door-locking operations within a defined time period, the central door locking system will be

deactivated and remain inoperative for a defined time period. This is to prevent the door actuators from overheating. After

a fixed time delay, the system will re-activate and operate as normal.

Functional Description of Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

Refer to Figure 12J – 7 for the following description:

Door Unlocking

The door locks can be activated by either:

• Remote coded key (LOCK or UNLOCK buttons),

• Remote coded key being rotated to the unlock position in the door lock, and

• Internal door lock snib being pulled upwards

Each door lock is fitted with a reversible electric motor that is mechanically coupled to a threaded shaft that moves the

door locking mechanism up and down, together with the cam that operates a microswitch within the door lock actuator

that controls the direction of the motor operation.

There are three BCM relays that control the operation of the door locks; these being:

• Drivers Door Unlock relay

• Passenger Door Unlock relay

• All Doors Lock relay

The Stage 1 sequence of operation shows the driver’s door lock in the locked position. The driver door unlock relay is the

controlling device that initiates the unlocking action. In its static state, both of the motor coil’s connections are connected

to battery ground via X1 pin 5 on the lock and through to A15 – X4 pin 8 on the BCM.

When Stage 2 unlocking is required, this means the BCM has detected that an unlocking action is required from either

the remote coded key button being pressed, the key being rotated in the door lock, or the internal door snib has been

lifted upward from within the vehicle; if deadlocking has not been applied.

Once an unlock requirement has been detected, the BCM energises the driver door relay coil for approximately 750

milliseconds, which applies 12 V to X1 pin 2 on the driver lock actuator. Within 500 milliseconds of this occurring, the

door locking motor moves from the lock position to the unlock position.

In stage 3, once it has reached its limit, the cam on the lock shaft activates its microswitch, which changes the X1 pin 1

motor coil supply voltage over to a different supply connected to the all door lock relay. At this point, the motor stops

rotating as it reaches its physical limit. Approximately 250 milliseconds later, the drivers door unlock relay de-energises,

resulting in 0 V (ground) appearing across the terminals of the motor.

The Stage 3 diagram shows the static state of the locks and the all door lock and driver door unlock relays in the

unlocked position.

Stage 4 shows the transition stage of the driver’s lock while door locking is in progress. To commence this process, the

BCM responds to a locking request by activating the all door lock relay for approximately 750 milliseconds as shown in

the diagram. This then puts 12 V on the lock’s motor X1 pin 6 via internal wiring to produce reverse current flow to the

motor through X1 pin 2 to the BCM’s de-energised driver door unlock relay A15 – X4 pin 8.

Once the motor has driven to its Lock position, the door lock cam then releases the microswitch, which prepares the

motor coil circuit to again respond to the Unlock command as described in Stage 2 previously. Some 250 milliseconds

later, the all door lock relay de-energises and the battery voltage is removed from the motor via door lock X1 pin 6.

Stage 5 reflects the initial Stage 1 condition being achieved, with the system shown in the Lock condition.

The same process can be applied for the operation of the passenger door locking mechanism.

Body Control Module Page 12J–35

Page 12J–35

Functional Diagram of Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

Figure 12J – 7

Body Control Module Page 12J–36

Page 12J–36

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Unlocking

Driver’s Door Unlock Input Signal

When unlocking the doors from the driver’s door-lock or door-lock button, BCM A15 – X4 pin 16 is connected to ground.

This causes the voltage on A15 – X4 pin 16 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as a driver’s

door unlock request signal.

NOTE

Manually activating any unlock request circuit

triggers all doors to be unlocked.

Passenger Door Unlock Input Signal

When unlocking the doors using any passenger door interior lock button, A15 – X4 pin 5 is connected to ground. This

causes the voltage on A15 – X4 pin 5 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as a passenger door

unlock request signal.

A low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 16 or X4 pin 5 is seen by the BCM as a system unlock request and the BCM energises the

internal passenger door unlock relay for approximately 0.75 second. The relay contacts close and battery voltage is

applied to:

• X1 pin 2 of each of the door-lock actuators and

• The lock actuator Y23 – X1 pin 3, and

The opposite terminal of the door-lock actuators, X1 pin 1, is connected to ground within the BCM, via A15 – X4 pin 9,

the internal all doors deadlock relay contacts and A15 – X1 pin 11. This causes the door-lock actuator to rotate from the

lock to the unlock position, and the door-lock actuator switch contacts to change from X1 pin 1 to X1 pin 6. The rotation of

the passenger door-lock actuator motor armatures also causes the door-lock snib button to change from the lock to the

unlock position. The lock actuator motor is grounded via A15 – X4 pin 10 and the BCM internal all doors lock relay

contacts.

Two-stage Unlock

If the BCM is operating in the two-stage unlock mode and the remote coded key UNLOCK button is depressed for

0.25 second, the BCM activates the microprocessor within the BCM. This causes the driver’s door unlock relay to toggle

to the unlock state, unlocking the driver’s door only.

If the remote coded key unlock button is again depressed for 0.25 second, the BCM toggles the passenger door unlock

relay contacts to the unlock state and the passenger doors unlock.

If the remote coded key is depressed continuously for 0.5 second, the BCM unlocks all doors: first, the driver’s door, then

the passenger doors.

Single-stage Unlock

If the BCM is operating in the single-stage unlock mode and the remote coded key UNLOCK button is depressed for

0.25 second, the BCM toggles both the driver’s door unlock relay and the passenger door unlock relay to the unlock state

and all doors unlock.

Deadlock to Unlock Operation

When manually unlocking the doors at the driver’s door-lock from the deadlock to the unlock position, the Driver’s Door

Lock Switch microswitch contact sends this ground signal to the A15 – X4 pin 16 via circuit 781. This low voltage at A15 –

X4 pin 16 is seen by the BCM as the Driver’s Door Unlock Request signal. The BCM then energises both the Driver’s

Door unlock relay and the Passenger door unlock relay for approximately 0.75 second. This causes battery voltage to be

applied to X1 pin 2 of each door-lock actuator and to X1 pin 3 through circuit 694.

Body Control Module Page 12J–37

Page 12J–37

Initially, actuator X1 pin 6 is connected to ground through A15 – X4 pin 10, the internal all doors lock relay contacts. This

causes the passenger and the rear passenger door-lock actuators to rotate and move from the deadlock position,

through the lock position to the unlock position. As this movement occurs, the passenger door-lock actuators contacts

momentarily switch from X1 pin 6 to X1 pin 1 before switching back to X1 pin 6 and the door lock snib buttons are moved

to the unlock position.

Locking

Front Door Lock Request Input Signal

With the doors closed, all doors can be mechanically locked via the driver’s or front passenger’s (interior door snib) or a

single locking operation of the driver’s door-lock using the key.

Either of these actions with the snib causes the driver’s door lock switch microswitch contacts to change to the lock

position, which connects A15 – X4 pin 20 to ground from circuit 650. This changes the voltage on A15 – X4 pin 20 to less

than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as a system lock request.

A lock request triggers the BCM to energise the internal all doors lock relay for approximately 0.75 second. The relay

contacts close and apply battery voltage through A15 – X4 pin 10 of the BCM to X1 pin 6 of each door-lock actuator and

to X1 pin 1 of the actuator. Connector X1 pin 2 of each passenger door actuator and X1 pin 3 of the actuator is

connected to ground through A15 – X4 pin 1 and the internal passenger door unlock relay contacts. X1 pin 2 of the

driver’s door-lock actuator is connected to ground through A15 – X4 pin 8 and the internal driver’s door unlock relay

contacts.

These connections energise the door-lock actuators to rotate to the lock position, which moves the all passenger door-

lock snib buttons to the lock position and changes the switch contacts from X1 pin 6 to X1 pin 1.

Deadlock Request Input Signal

When the ignition is off and the driver’s door is closed, the doors can be deadlocked by two sequential lock operations of

the driver’s door-lock. If the driver’s door is open, or if the ignition is on, the doors will not deadlock.

Two sequential lock operations cause the driver’s door lock switch microswitch contacts to change to the lock position

and connect A15 – X4 pin 17 to ground from circuit 650. This changes the voltage on A15 – X4 pin 17 to less than 0.2 V,

which is seen by the BCM as the system deadlock request. The BCM then energises the internal all doors lock relay and

all doors deadlock relay for approximately 0.75 second, which supplies battery voltage to X1 pin 6 and X1 pin 1 of the

door-lock actuators.

Connector X1 pin 2 of each passenger door-lock motor is connected to ground within the BCM, via A15 – X4 pin 1 and

the internal passenger door unlock relay contacts. Connector X1 pin 2 of the driver’s door-lock motor is connected to

ground within the BCM, via A15 – X4 pin 8 and the driver’s door unlock relay contacts.

These connections energise the door-lock actuator motors to rotate to the deadlock position. This rotation causes the

actuator switch contacts to change from X1 pin 6 to X1 pin 1 and back to X1 pin 6 and moves the door lock snib buttons

to the lock position.

Remote Coded Key – Locking

When locking the doors using the remote coded key, the signal from the LOCK button is transmitted by radio

transmission to the remote key receiver unit located within the vehicle. The key’s decoded signal then activates the BCM

microprocessor, which energises the all doors lock relay, which then provides battery voltage to all of the vehicle’s door

locks.

If any door does not lock, either A15 – X4 pin 16 unlock request or A15 – X4 pin 5 passenger’s doors unlock request

remains low and this low voltage is seen by the BCM as an unsuccessful attempt to lock all doors.

If the BCM detects the driver’s door is open, the BCM then momentarily sounds the theft deterrent horns to alert the

driver that vehicle locking failed.

Door Input Signals

Door Ajar Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses the door ajar switch input signal to determine if the driver’s door is open or closed. When the door is

open, the door ajar switch grounds A15 – X4 pin 19 via circuit 746. This causes the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 to be

pulled low to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as the driver’s door ajar input signal.

Passenger’s Door Ajar Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses the passenger’s door ajar switch input signal to determine if a passenger’s door is open. If either rear

doors or the front passenger’s door is open, A15 – X4 pin 4 is grounded through circuit 745. This causes the voltage at

A15 – X4 pin 4 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as the passenger door ajar input signal.

Body Control Module Page 12J–38

Page 12J–38

2.7 Rear Compartment Lid Release

System Operation

Pressing either the rear compartment release switch located in the instrument panel compartment or the rear

compartment release button on the remote coded key, releases the rear compartment. Pressing the rear compartment

release button on the remote coded key transmits an RF output signal. The remote receiver detects this signal and the

BCM activates the microprocessor within the BCM to control the operation of the rear compartment lid release.

The rear compartment release switch is disabled when the theft deterrent system is armed via:

• the remote code key,

• the driver’s door microswitch, and

• the vehicle deadlock.

The rear compartment release switch is only enabled when the theft deterrent system is disarmed either by pressing the

UNLOCK button on the remote coded key, or the slip ring receiving a valid security code when the ignition is turned on.

The BCM monitors the rear compartment release switch and remote rear compartment signal and stops the rear

compartment release operating if the vehicle speed is above 20 km/h.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Battery Power

Battery voltage is applied to the BCM microprocessor A15 – X1 pin 10, through fusible link F104 and fuse F29 via circuit

740.

Inputs

Serial Data Signal — V6

The serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 5 is connected to the PIM A5 – X1 pin 10, via circuit 800. This serial data bus line

supplies the BCM with serial data relating to the speed of the vehicle. The PIM receives GM LAN data from the ECM and

translates this data to UART serial data for transmission to the primary UART bus for input to the BCM.

Serial Data Signal — GEN III V8

The serial data bus A15 – X2 pin 5 is connected to the PIM A5 – X1 pin 6 via circuit 800. A Class 2 serial data is

connected between PIM A5 – X1 pin 7, via circuit 1049, and PCM A84 – X1 pin 58. This serial data bus line supplies the

BCM with serial data relating to the speed of the vehicle.

Security and Central Door Locking Status Signals

The BCM internal status includes the state of both theft deterrent and entry deterrent system (Armed, Disarmed,

Triggered, Passively armed) and the central locking system (locked, unlocked etc).

If the BCM detects the theft deterrent system as armed or the central locking as deadlocked, the rear compartment

release function will be inhibited.

Rear Compartment Release Button Input

Pressing the rear compartment release switch causes the contacts to close, connecting A15 – X3 pin 8 to ground via

circuit 1576. This causes the voltage at A15 – X3 pin 8 to be reduced to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as a

rear compartment release switch input signal. The BCM will not actuate the rear compartment release relay if the vehicle

speed is greater than 20 km/h, the entry deterrent system is armed via the remote coded key, or the driver’s door-lock

microswitch is deadlocked.

Body Control Module Page 12J–39

Page 12J–39

Remote Coded Key Input

The radio frequency (RF) signal transmitted by the remote coded key is received by the BCM through the remote key

receiver. After pressing the remote coded key rear compartment release button for 0.5 seconds the rear compartment

lock actuator will activate providing the vehicle’s speed is less than 20 km/h.

Outputs

The BCM activates the rear compartment lock actuator by energising the internal boot solenoid relay. Power from A15 –

X4 pin 2 is applied to Y29 – X1 pin A of the rear compartment release actuator assembly via circuit 56. The ground circuit

for the rear compartment release solenoid is via the body and main wiring harness.

Body Control Module Page 12J–40

Page 12J–40

2.8 Theft Deterrent System

System Operation

The theft deterrent system uses a remote coded key to arm and disarm the system. The remote coded key is also used

to electrically lock or unlock all doors and the rear compartment lid.

V6 Engine

When the ignition is turned on, the BCM sends the PIM an encrypted BCM / Key security code. The security code is

received via the slip ring, or the by remote receiver in the event of no slip ring communication. The powertrain interface

module (PIM) sends this encrypted security code to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM compares the received

security code with its own security code, and if valid, the ECM returns an OK to Start message to the BCM via the PIM. If

the BCM does not receive an OK to Start message from the ECM via the PIM within 0.5 second of the ignition ON signal,

the BCM isolates the secondary data bus and a DTC will be set. Refer to 5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List.

Isolation of the secondary/tertiary data bus eliminates the possibility of a device failure, other than the BCM and the PIM,

causing a problem on the bus and inhibiting theft deterrent communications. This continues until the ECM responds with

an acknowledgment or for a maximum of 5 seconds, after which the BCM switches to the standard polling sequence.

Following successful anti-theft communications, the BCM begins sequential polling of devices on the bus and normal

system operation is established.

When the ignition is off, the BCM continues to poll, allowing for Tech 2 communications and external control of the bus

prior to the ignition being switched on.

GEN III V8 Engine

When the ignition is turned on, the BCM sends the PIM an encrypted BCM / Key security code. The security code is

received via the slip ring, or the by remote receiver in the event of no slip ring communication. The PIM compares the

received security code with the PCM stored security code and if the codes match, the PIM allows engine cranking and

sends a separate encrypted security code to the PCM. The PCM compares this code with its stored security code and if

the codes match, the PCM allows injector fuelling to continue. The PCM returns an OK to Start message to the BCM via

the PIM. If the BCM does not receive an OK to Start message from the PIM within 0.5 second of the ignition ON signal,

the BCM isolates the secondary data bus and a DTC will be set. Refer to 5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List.

Isolation of the secondary/tertiary data bus eliminates the possibility of a device failure, other than the BCM and the PIM,

causing a problem on the bus and inhibiting theft deterrent communications. This continues until the PIM responds with

an acknowledgment or for a maximum of 5 seconds, after which the BCM switches to the standard polling sequence.

Following successful anti-theft communications, the BCM begins sequential polling of devices on the bus and normal

system operation is established.

When the ignition is off, the BCM continues to poll, allowing for Tech 2 communications and external control of the bus

prior to the ignition being switched on.

Armed

The theft deterrent system can be armed actively, by pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key or passively,

when the BCM automatically arms the system 30 seconds after the ignition is turned off.

When the theft deterrent system is armed, the start relay located in the engine compartment relay housing is disabled

preventing the engine from being started.

Disarmed

The theft deterrent system can be disarmed by pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key which will unlock

the doors, turn the interior dome lamp on and disarm the system for 30 seconds. The same actions can be accomplished

by inserting the remote coded key into the ignition switch and turning the ignition on.

With the theft deterrent in the disarmed state the PIM is live and can be interrogated by the ECM or PCM.

NOTE

On V6 theft deterrent is disarmed at the BCM,

however the ECM does not become active until

the ignition key is turned on.

The BCM then reads a security code (serial data output) from the remote coded key contact pin via the ignition switch slip

ring. If a valid key is authenticated at the slip ring then the BCM will initiate communications with the PIM as soon as the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Body Control Module Page 12J–41

Page 12J–41

NOTE

Both the V6 and V8 systems allow up to 1 second

of cranking time if the code is invalid. T his usually

results in the engine starting but then dying after

2 – 3 seconds. Normally this allows for fuel

priming and reduces start delays while the

security message is being validated. Engine

crank is then disabled until the next ignition cycle

of key off – key on.

NOTE

If the engine cranks briefly when the ignition

switch is turned to the START position, there may

be a faulty remote coded key reader. Press the

unlock button on the remote coded key to disarm

the theft deterrent system.

Remote Coded Key

The theft deterrent system uses a remote coded key to arm / disarm the system and electrically lock or unlock all doors

including the rear compartment lid lock.

The radio frequency (RF) signal transmitted by the remote coded key is received by the BCM through the remote key

receiver that is located in the instrument panel between the demist ducts.

After pressing the remote coded key LOCK button to arm the theft deterrent system, the turn signal lamps flash once and

the security status indicator LED begins to flash. After disarming the system by pressing the key, UNLOCK button, the

turn signal lamps flash twice and the security status indicator LED stops flashing.

NOTE

Passive arming of the system does not

automatically operate the door-locks or flash the

turn signal lamps.

Battery

The remote coded key is powered by its own internal battery. If this battery fails, the remote coded key reader can power

the key when it is inserted into the ignition switch and turned on or to the start position.

Security Status Indicator

The security status indicator LED indicates the state of the system. When flashing, the LED indicates the system

is armed and the vehicle cannot be started. When the BCM is disarmed, the LED is turned off and the engine

can be started. The security status indicator LED is located in the instrument cluster assembly, refer to

Section 12C Instrumentation.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Battery Power

Battery voltage is applied to the BCM A15 – X1 pin 10 at all times from fusible link F104 and fuse F29, circuit 740.

Turn Signal Lamp Power

Battery voltage is applied to A15 – X1 pin 13 at all times from fusible link F102 and fuse F7, circuits 442 and 140.

Body Control Module Page 12J–42

Page 12J–42

Inputs

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition is turned on or to the start position. When the ignition is

turned on or to the start position, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 2 from the ignition switch, circuit 300.

Slip Ring Signal

The BCM reads a security code (serial data output) from the remote coded key contact pin via the ignition switch slip ring

S149 – X2A to the BCM A15 – X2 pin 7. If a valid key is authenticated at the slip ring the BCM will initiate

communications with the PIM when the ignition switch is turned to the On position.

BCM and PIM Serial Data Communication – V6

When the ignition is turned on, the BCM communicates using UART serial data with the PIM via the serial data

communication line A15 – X2 pin 5 and A5 – X1 pin 10, circuit 800.

BCM and PIM Serial Data Communication – GEN III V8

When the ignition is turned on, the BCM communicates using UART serial data with the PIM via the serial data

communication line A15 – X2 pin 5 and A5 – X1 pin 6, circuit 800.

Driver's Doorjamb Switch

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the driver's door is opened or closed. The BCM must sense the driver's

door is closed before the theft deterrent system can be actively armed.

When the door is open (or not fully closed), the door ajar switch grounds A15 – X4 pin 19 via circuit 746. This causes the

voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V. This low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 is seen by the BCM as

the driver's door ajar input signal.

NOTE

Passive arming of the system will also occur if the

drivers door has been closed and not opened for

30 seconds. The security status indicator LED will

begin to flash when passive arming occurs.

Outputs

Left-hand Turn Signal Lamps

The BCM controls the operation of the left-hand turn signal lamps by pulsing the BCM internal hazard / theft indicator

relay. This causes the relay contacts to close and open a number of times applying battery voltage intermittently from

A15 – X1 pin13 to A15 – X1 pin 4 and the left-hand turn signal lamps via circuit 1314.

Right-hand I Turn Signal Lamps

The BCM controls the operation of the right-hand turn signal lamps through the same relay used to control the left-hand

indicators. Pulsing of the BCM hazard / theft indicator relay causes the indicator relay contacts to close and open a

number of times. This applies battery voltage intermittently from A15 – X1 pin 13 to A15 – X1 pin 3 and the right-hand

turn signal lamps via circuit 1315.

Security Status Indicator LED

The security status indicator LED continuously flashes while the system is armed. The BCM controls the operation of the

security status indicator LED applied at P3 – X1 pin 9 via an internal switch within the BCM A15 – X1 pin 21, circuit 264.

Body Control Module Page 12J–43

Page 12J–43

2.9 Entry Deterrent System

System Operation

The BCM entry deterrent system is designed to deter unwanted access to the vehicle's passenger compartment. The

system provides an audible and visual warning of unauthorised entry to the vehicle.

Arming of the theft and entry deterrent systems is by pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

NOTE

• The entry deterrent system does not arm

passively.

• The remote coded key also incorporates a

rear compartment release function button.

• An ultrasonic sensor option can also be fitted

to the vehicle.

Arming the System

Upon pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key, the system will arm 10 seconds after locking the doors. The

output signal from the key activates the BCM microprocessor if the ignition is off and the vehicle road speed input

indicates the speed is zero. One continuous press on a remote coded key button should cause only one arm / disarm

operation. It is not possible to arm the system or remote lock the doors with the driver's door open.

When the system is armed, the following actions take place:

• All doors,

• All turn signal lamps lights flash once,

• The power antenna retracts,

• The power window system deactivates,

• The dome light is switched off provided it has not been turned on by another system, and

Triggered Operation

Once the entry deterrent system is armed, it is triggered by any one of the following inputs:

• Hood opening (circuit 263).

• Rear compartment lid opening (circuit 744).

• Drivers door being opened (circuit 746).

• Passenger and any rear doors being opened (circuit 745).

• The ignition being switched on (circuit 300).

If any of the previous conditions exist at the time of the system arming, they are ignored until the fault condition is

cleared.

Once triggered, the system operates as follows:

• All turn signal lamps lights flash at a frequency of one flash every two seconds.

• All vehicle horns pulse at a frequency of one pulse per second.

• The dome light flashes at a frequency of one flash every two seconds.

The turn signal lamps and dome lamp flash, and the horn/s sound for 30 seconds.

Body Control Module Page 12J–44

Page 12J–44

Disarming Procedure

The system is disarmed by:

• Pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key which generates an RF output signal to activate the BCM

microprocessor via circuit 218, or

• Turning the ignition on if the remote coded key is not working due to a flat battery. This allows the BCM to provide a

power supply to the remote coded key, enabling reading of the key security code.

The following actions occur when the system is disarmed:

• All doors unlock.

• All turn signal lamps lights flash twice, but if the system has been triggered since being armed, they will flash three

times.

• The dome light is activated for 30 seconds during low light conditions.

• The power window system remains enabled for 45 seconds before shutting down.

Multi-function Display (MFD) Trigger Point Displays

The instrument clusters MFD displays the codes of the triggered points. The BCM sends the information to the

instrument cluster via the serial communications bus. The Alarm Activated screen is displayed first for 1 second, followed

by the trigger point screens.

The trigger point screens are also displayed for 1 second. If more than one trigger point has been activated the MFD will

display each trigger point screen in sequence for 1 second, returning to the Alarm Activated screen. Refer to

Section 12C Instrumentation.

The trigger points are driver’s door, passenger door, rear compartment lid, hood and hotwire.

NOTE

Alarm codes are stored in the BCM until they are

cleared by Tech 2.

Remote Rear Compartment Release

The rear compartment release solenoid is activated when the rear compartment button on the remote coded key has

been pressed continuously for more than 0.5 second and the vehicle road speed is less than or equal to 20 km/h per

hour. The RF output signal from the remote coded key activates the BCM microprocessor.

The remote rear compartment release function can also operate while the entry deterrent is armed without triggering the

system. When the rear compartment input is inhibited from triggering the entry deterrent system, the hood input is also

inhibited. After the rear compartment has been closed for 30 seconds, the system re-arms the rear compartment and the

hood sensing.

Loss of Vehicle Battery Power

If there is a re-connection of battery power to the BCM, the theft and entry deterrent systems resume in the same state

as when the battery power was disconnected, except if the system was disarmed. If the system was disarmed, it will

default to passive arm.

Body Control Module Page 12J–45

Page 12J–45

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Power Supplies

Battery Power

Battery voltage is applied constantly to the BCM microprocessor through A15 – X1 pin 10 from fusible link F104 and fuse

F29 via circuit 740.

Turn Signal Lamp Power

Battery voltage is applied to A15 – X1 pin 13 at all times from fusible link F102 and fuse F7 via circuit 140.

Inputs

Ignition Switch On Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition is turned on or to the start position. When the ignition is

turned on or turned to the start position, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 2 from the ignition switch via circuit

300.

Driver's Door Jamb Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the driver's door is open or closed. When the door is open, the jamb

switch grounds A15 – X4 pin 19 via circuit 746. This causes the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 to be pulled low to less than

0.2 V (driver's door ajar). This low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 is seen by the BCM as the driver's door ajar input signal.

Passenger’s Door Jamb Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if any of the passenger doors are open or if all passenger doors are closed.

If the right-hand rear, left-hand rear, or front passenger door is open, A15 – X4 pin 4 is grounded through circuit 745. This

causes the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 4 is pulled low to less than 0.2 V. This low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 4 is seen by the

BCM as the passenger door ajar input signal.

Hood Open Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the hood is open or closed. When the hood is closed, battery voltage from

A15 – X2 pin 11, via circuit 109 passes through the hood switch to A15 – X3 pin 11, via circuit 263. This voltage at A15 –

X3 pin 11 is seen by the BCM as the hood closed input signal. In the event of an open circuit in either circuit 109 or 263,

the BCM internal pull down resistor ensures the voltage at the input to the microprocessor is less than 0.2 V. This low

voltage at the microprocessor is seen as the hood open signal. This is to ensure that if either of these two circuits is

tampered with, the alarm will be triggered.

When the hood is opened, the theft deterrent hood open switch closes and grounds the A15 – X3 pin 11 through circuit

263. This action causes the voltage at the A15 – X3 pin 11 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 V (hood open). This low voltage

at A15 – X3 pin 11 is seen by the BCM as the hood open input signal.

Rear Compartment Lamp Switch Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the rear compartment is open or closed. When the rear compartment is

open, the rear compartment lamp switch grounds A15 – X4 pin 6 through circuit 744. This causes the voltage at BCM

A15 – X4 pin 6 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V. This low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 6 is seen by the BCM as the rear

compartment open input signal.

Body Control Module Page 12J–46

Page 12J–46

Vehicle Speed Signal

The vehicle speed is received from the ECM or PCM via the PIM and the serial data communications bus to the A15 –

X2 pin 5 and circuit 800.

Remote Coded Key RF Signals

When the LOCK, UNLOCK or rear compartment button on the remote coded key is pressed, the remote coded key

transmits a radio frequency (RF) signal. When the BCM receives one of these signals, it determines from the signal

characteristics by which button was pressed.

Rear Compartment Release Input Signals

Pressing the rear compartment lock switch in the glove box causes the switch contacts to close, connecting BCM A15 –

X3 pin 8 to ground via circuit 1576. This causes the voltage at A15 – X3 pin 8 to be pulled low to less than 0.2 V. This low

voltage at A15 – X3 pin 8 is seen by the BCM as the rear compartment release switch input signal.

NOTE

The BCM will not activate the rear compartment

lock solenoid if the vehicle speed is above 20

kilometres per hour.

Outputs

Dome Lamp

Battery voltage is applied to all interior lamps through fuse F6, circuit 1140 and interior illumination relay X129. The

opposite sides of the dome lamps are connected to ground via circuit 660 and A15 – X4 pin 22. The BCM controls the

operation of the dome lamps connected to this ground circuit by energising the BCM dome light control relay. This

causes the internal relay contacts to close, completing the circuit to ground.

Horn Relay

The BCM can operate the vehicle horn/s by pulsing the horn relay coil to ground through A15 – X1 pin 17, circuit 28.

Theft-deterrent Horn Relay

The BCM controls the operation of the theft-deterrent horn by pulsing the theft horn relay coil to ground through A15 – X3

pin 15, circuit 1149.

Left-hand Turn Signal Lamps

The BCM controls the operation of the left-hand turn signal lamps by pulsing the BCM internal hazard/theft indicator

relay. This allows battery voltage from A15 – X1 pin 13 to be applied in pulses to the left-hand turn signal lamps via A15 –

X1 pin 4, circuit 1314.

Right-hand Turn Signal Lamps

The BCM controls the operation of the right-hand turn signal lamps by pulsing the BCM internal hazard/theft indicator

relay. This allows battery voltage from A15 – X1 pin 13 to be applied in pulses to the right-hand turn signal lamps via A15

– X1 pin 3, circuit 1315.

Rear Compartment Release Actuator

The BCM activates the rear compartment actuator solenoid Y29 by energising the BCM internal rear compartment lid

solenoid relay. This applies battery voltage through the rear compartment lid solenoid relay contacts and A15 – X4 pin 2,

to the rear compartment actuator solenoid Y29 via circuit 56. The ground circuit for the rear compartment actuator

solenoid is via the body and main wiring harness.

Body Control Module Page 12J–47

Page 12J–47

2.10 Power Window System

System Operation

The BCM controls the operation of the power window relay, which controls the power supply to all window motors and the

automatic down function of the driver and front passenger windows.

Legend

1 Driver’s Window Switch

2 Rear Passenger Window Switches (Left and Right-

hand)

3 Front Passenger Window Switch

4 Lockout Switch

Figure 12J – 8

System Active

NOTE

Before the rear power windows can operate, the

lockout switch must be closed. An illuminated

light emitting diode (LED) in each of the window

rocker switches indicates the system is

energised.

All switches are energised when the ignition is on. When the ignition is turned off, all window switches remain energised

for 45 seconds after a door is opened or for 60 minutes if no doors are opened. If a power window switch is activated

during the 45-second period, the period recommences.

The 60-minute delay is cancelled when the doors are locked.

NOTE

If the BCM has entered battery saver mode,

power is removed from the window system when

the ignition is switched off.

System Inactive

The window switch LED's are not illuminated when the system is inactive.

Automatic Down Operation of Front Windows

The driver and front passenger windows are activated when the DOWN button is pressed for more than 0.4 second.

1 With the ignition on, press the driver’s window

switch (1) to the DOWN position for more than

0.4 second and release it.

The window will continue to lower until it is in the fully down

position.

2 Interrupt the automatic down feature by:

a operating the window UP switch momentarily

b pressing the DOWN switch again. The window

stops when the DOWN button is released.

The same operations apply to the front passenger’s

window and switch (2).

Figure 12J – 9

Body Control Module Page 12J–48

Page 12J–48

Lockout Switch

The lockout switch affects the operation of the rear

windows only. When the lockout switch is closed, the rear

windows can be raised or lowered from the centre console

switch or from the rocker switches in the rear doors.

Check the operation of the lockout switch as follows:

1 Turn on the ignition.

2 Check the LED’s are illuminated in all door

switches.

3 Open and close the rear windows using the

rocker switches located in the rear doors.

4 Press the lockout switch button (1) in the centre

of the switch console.

5 Check the LED’s are not illuminated.

• Check the rear windows can only be raised and

lowered from the centre console switch.

Figure 12J – 10

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

A permanent-magnet motor operates each of the power window mechanisms to raise or lower the window glass. The

direction in which the motor turns depends on the polarity of the voltage applied to the motor terminals. The power

window switches control the voltage polarity.

Ignition ON Input Signal

When the ignition is turned on or to the start position, battery voltage from the ignition switch is applied to A15 – X3 pin 2

via circuit 300.

When the BCM receives an ignition ON input, it energises the power window relay by grounding the relay coil through

A15 – X1 pin 8 and circuit 1351.

When the power window relay coil is energised, the relay contacts close and power is applied to the power window

switches via circuit breaker F1. The opposite side of each window switch LED is connected to ground, therefore they

illuminate, indicating the system is energised.

NOTE

The power window lockout switch in the centre

console must be closed to activate the rear door

window switches.

Driver and Front Passenger Window-down Circuit

NOTE

Pressing the switch for less than 0.4 seconds

does not engage the automatic down feature.

When the right front window down switch is pressed for less than 0.4 seconds current from the power window relay,

circuit 638 passes through the power window switch to A15 – X4 pin 12. From A15 – X4 pin 12, the current passes

through the contacts of the BCM right front window relay to the right front window motor via A15 – X4 pin 13 and circuit

667. The opposite side of the motor is grounded through circuit 666, the right front window switch and circuit 650.

Body Control Module Page 12J–49

Page 12J–49

The BCM senses the length of time the button is operated, at A15 – X4 pin 12. If the window down switch is pressed for

more than 0.4 second, the BCM energises the internal relay to allow the window to lower fully.

This auto-down feature also applies to the left front window. The voltage from the power window relay is applied through

S222 – X1 pin 13 of the left front window switch to A15 – X4 pin 26, circuit 1136, then through the BCM relay contacts

and A15 – X4 pin 25, circuit 165 to one side of the left front power window motor. The opposite side of the motor is

connected to ground on circuit 164 via switch S222 – X1 pin 12 and S222 – X1 pin 9 to circuit 650.

Window-down Input Signal

When the right front window down switch is pressed, voltage from the power window relay to window switch S222 – X1

pin 10, circuit 638 is applied to A15 – X4 pin 12 indicating the window down signal input. When the left front window down

switch is pressed, voltage from the power window relay to window switch S222 – X1 pin 10, circuit 638 is applied to A15 –

X4 pin 26 indicating the window down signal input.

When the BCM receives a right front or left front window down input signal that is present at either A15 – X4 pin 12 or X4

pin 26 for more than 0.4 seconds, the BCM’s internal relays will become energised and the auto down function will be

activated. The internal relay contacts change over, allowing battery voltage from the A15 – X4 pin 11, through the internal

relay contacts and A15 – X4 pin 13 or A15 – X4 pin 25 to one side of the either the right front or left front power window

motor on circuit 667 or circuit 165.

If the window is moving down and the down switch is again pressed, the BCM microprocessor senses this voltage at A15

– X4 pin 12 or A15 – X4 pin 26 and de-energises the internal relay. The relay contacts open and the motor stops when

the switch is released.

If the window up button is momentarily pulled up while the window in moving down, a positive battery supply is present on

both sides of the motor armature and the motor stops. If the up button is continuously pressed while the window is

moving down, the window-down function is cancelled and the window moves up.

The power window motors each contain an internal overload thermal breaker which is activated (opens) if the power

window switch is held in the Up or Down position for more than approximately 20 seconds. This prevents overheating of

the power window motor. After a cool-down time of approximately 40 seconds, the thermal breaker closes again and

allows normal motor operation.

Driver and Front Passenger Window-up Circuit

Right Front Window-up Input Signal

By pulling up and holding the right front window up button, battery voltage from the power window relay is applied to the

right front window motor through switch S222 – X1 pin 7 and circuit 666. Circuit 667 is connected to ground through A15

– X4 pin 13, A15 – X4 pin 12, the power window switch and circuit 650. This causes the motor armature to rotate and

raise the window while the button on the power window-up switch is pressed.

Left Front Window-up Input Signal

By pulling up and holding the left front window up button, battery voltage from the power window relay is applied to the

left front window motor through switch S222 – X1 pin 12 and circuit 164. Circuit 165 is connected to ground through A15

– X4 pin 25, A15 – X4 pin 26, the power window switch and circuit 650. This causes the motor armature to rotate and

raise the window while the button on the power window-up switch is pressed.

Rear Passenger Window Operation

Power is supplied to all the centre console power window switches from the power window relay. Power is supplied to the

rear window switches when the lockout switch is closed.

By pressing the appropriate down or up window switch, battery voltage is applied to the window motor through the lockout

switch and the window switch contacts. The other side of the motor is connected to ground through circuit 650 and the

motor armature rotates while the motor switch is pressed.

Body Control Module Page 12J–50

Page 12J–50

2.11 Wiper System Intermittent Function

System Operation

This system controls the front intermittent wiper. The front wiper dwell is dependent on the vehicle road speed as well as

the position of the adjustable potentiometer (located on the wiper control stalk). Within limits, the faster the vehicle’s

speed, the shorter the dwell time.

The front wipers use a wipe after wash function. When a washer pump switch is pressed for more than 0.5 second, the

wipers sweep continuously, at low speed, until the washer pump has been deactivated. The wiper is then energised for a

calculated time period to enable the wiper sweeps to be completed, as follows:

• One additional sweep if the washer switch is pressed for less than 1 second.

• Two additional sweeps if the washer switch is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds.

• Three additional sweeps if the washer switch is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds.

To perform the correct number of additional sweeps, the wiper motor park switch is monitored by the BCM via circuit 196.

This ensures the wiper power is supplied to the park switch at the optimum time.

Vehicles are fitted with the Road-speed Dependent Variable-dwell wiper system, noting the following:

• Communication between the PCM and the BCM on vehicles with GEN III V8 engines is via the PIM.

• Communication between the ECM and the BCM on vehicles with a V6 engines is via the PIM.

• If the ignition switch is turned to the accessories position and the vehicle enters Battery Saver Mode, the

intermittent wipers will not operate.

• The variations in the dwell time are determined by the vehicle road speed. The faster the vehicle travels the shorter

the dwell time.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Intermittent Wiper Switch

Placing the wiper / washer switch in the INT position applies battery voltage to A15 – X3 pin 3, circuit 112 via:

• Fusible link F105

• Accessory control relay contacts

• Fuse F18

• Circuit 243, and

• The wiper washer switch INT contacts.

Battery voltage at A15 – X3 pin 3 is seen by the BCM as the intermittent wiper input signal and triggers the BCM to

energise the front wiper relay. This applies battery voltage from fuse F18 and A15 – X1 pin 2, to the wiper motor low

speed circuit via:

• A15 – X1 pin 12

• Circuit 96

• Wiper switch intermittent terminals, and

• Circuit 95.

Body Control Module Page 12J–51

Page 12J–51

This voltage supply causes the wiper motor armature to rotate, which changes the wiper motor park switch from contacts

A - B to contacts A - C. Voltage from fuse F18 is now applied through contacts A - C and circuit 196 to A15 – X1 pin 1.

Once the wiper motor park switch enter the parked region, the park switch contacts change back to A - B which changes

the input at A15 – X1 pin 1 to ground through circuit 196, the park switch contacts A - B and circuit 550. The voltage at

A15 – X1 pin 1 is now less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as the park switch, input signal and the BCM turns off

the intermittent wiper relay to stop the wiper motor.

Wiper Dwell Controller

A15 – X2 pin 4 is connected to ground through, circuit 477, the wiper dwell-controller and circuit 251. Adjusting the switch

from slow to fast causes the potentiometer (variable resistor) inside the controller to vary in resistance, which changes

the voltage at A15 – X2 pin 4 within a range of approximately 0.6 to 2.5 V. As the voltage increases, the dwell time

decreases.

NOTE

If the battery is disconnected then connected, it is

necessary for the dwell potentiometer to be

rotated from one extreme to the other to enable

the BCM to re-learn the range values and

properly calculate the dwell values.

Vehicle Speed and Reverse Gear

The vehicle speed is received from the ECM or PCM via the PIM and the serial data communications bus to the A15 –

X2 pin 5 and circuit 800.

A15 – X2 pin 5 also receives data relating to the selection of reverse gear, via the serial data bus, circuit 800.

Window Washer Switch

When the washer pump switch is activated, battery voltage is applied to the washer pump M19 – X1 pin 1 and A15 – X3

pin 13, via fuse F18, circuit 243 and the washer switch contacts and circuit 228. This causes the voltage at A15 – X3 pin

13 to increase from less than 0.2 – 12 V, which is seen by the BCM as the washer switch input signal. The length of time

that this voltage is present at A15 – X3 pin 13 determines the number of additional wiper sweeps.

The BCM determines the number of completed wiper sweeps by monitoring the voltage at A15 – X1 pin 1, park switch

input; the voltage at A15 – X1 pin 1 changes from 12 V to less than 0.2 V at the completion of each sweep.

Body Control Module Page 12J–52

Page 12J–52

2.12 Dome Lamp Delay Control

System Operation

The interior lighting operates for a 30 second (default) period after:

• a door is opened and then closed,

• the ignition is switched from the ON position to either the ACC or OFF position, or

• with the operation of central door unlocking.

When the dome lamp switch is set to the door position, the interior lighting operation depends on the sun load sensor.

Like the headlight controls, the dome lamps do not operate under bright conditions such as a sunny day, refer to

2.13 Automatic Lamp Control for more details. The interior lighting can be adjusted to operate under three sun load

sensor conditions – Early, Normal or Late. This is a customer selectable option, which can be changed using Tech 2

or Mode Select in the MFD.

The interior lighting delay time can be set to a desired value between 0 to 255 seconds by using Tech 2 or Mode Select

in the MFD.

NOTE

If the Auto Lock in Drive feature is being used,

the interior delay time will follow the Door

Open / Close and Central Door Unlocking setting

and not the Ignition OFF setting.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Inputs

Power circuit

Battery voltage is applied to all interior lights via fuse F6, circuit 1140, the interior illumination relay and circuit 149.

The opposite side of the dome lamps is connected to ground via circuit 660 and A15 – X4 pin 22. The BCM controls the

operation of these dome lamps by switching the internal dome light control relay. Energising the dome light control relay

closes the relay contacts, which complete the circuit to ground.

Ignition Switch On

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the ignition

switch is in the ON or START position, battery voltage is applied to the A15 – X3 pin 2 from the ignition switch via

circuit 300.

Driver’s Door Open

When the driver’s door is opened, A15 – X4 pin 19 is connected to ground via circuit 746 and the driver’s door ajar

switch. This changes the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as the driver's door

input signal.

Body Control Module Page 12J–53

Page 12J–53

Passenger Door Open

When any passenger door is opened, A15 – X4 pin 4 is connected to ground via circuit 745 and the passenger door ajar

switch. This causes the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 4 to be pulled to less than 0.2 V, which is seen by the BCM as the

passenger door open input signal.

Dome ON Signal

When the dome lamp switch is in the ON position, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X4 pin 21 from fuse F6 via circuit

1140, the interior illumination relay, circuit 149, the dome lamp switch contacts and circuit 157. Battery voltage at A15 –

X4 pin 21 is seen by the BCM as the dome lamp switch on input signal.

Dome Door Signal

When the dome lamp switch is in the DOOR position, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X4 pin 3 from fuse F6 via circuit

1140, the interior illumination relay, circuit 149, dome lamp switch contacts, and circuit 328. Battery voltage at A15 – X4

pin 3 is seen by the BCM as the dome lamp door input signal. When the dome lamp is switched to DOOR, the opposite

side of the dome lamp is connected to ground via circuit 660 and A15 – X4 pin 22. When a door ajar switch closes, the

BCM switches on the dome lamp by closing the dome light control relay contacts, completing the circuit to ground.

Body Control Module Page 12J–54

Page 12J–54

2.13 Automatic Lamp Control

System Operation

This system includes the following features:

• Automatic lights on,

• Automatic lights off, and

• Approach Illumination.

The automatic lights on and off control using the sun load sensor, turns the vehicle headlamps on and off, depending on

the outside light level.

When the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched off, the operation of the headlamps is the

same as the AUTO lights off operation.

Automatic Lights On

This feature works only while the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is on. The lights operate as

normal in other switch positions.

Light Level On / Off Adjustment

A light sensor B55 (sun load sensor) is mounted in the instrument panel pad of the vehicle to monitor the amount of light

in front of the vehicle. The BCM monitors the output of the sun load sensor and determines when the light levels are low

enough to turn the headlights on. Tech 2 can be used to select several different ON / OFF light levels to suit customer

preferences. The light levels can also be adjusted by the customer to Early / Normal / Late modes via the instrument

cluster MFD, using the trip computer switch, refer to Section 12C Instrumentation.

Automatic Lights Off

The automatic lights off feature automatically switches the headlamps and park lamps off after the driver leaves the

vehicle.

NOTE

Since this system is safety related, it is

mandatory the BCM light control outputs default

to the ON state in the event of a system failure,

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This gives direct control of the lights to the

headlamp switch.

Activation

All the following events must occur to switch the lights off automatically:

1 The vehicle road speed input to the BCM is less than 10 km/h and there has not been a sudden loss of speed

(ignition being switched off with the vehicle travelling above 10 km/h).

2 The BCM senses the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the OFF position and remains in the OFF

position.

3 The headlamp switch has not been turned on after the ignition switch was turned off.

4 The BCM senses the driver's door is open.

When the ignition switch is turned back to the ON position, the lights revert to the position selected by the headlamp

switch and the mode of headlamp operation (i.e. high beam, low beam or fog lamps). This is determined by the position

of the relevant switches.

Lights Off Delay

There is a delay period before the automatic lights off feature turns off the vehicle lights. This time period can be set via

the instrument cluster MFD, with the trip computer switch, refer to Section 12C Instrumentation. The delay period can be

set for the Priority 1 and Priority 2 keys. The time delay is recalled when the UNLOCK button on the remote is pressed

and a Priority 1 or a Priority 2 key is used.

Body Control Module Page 12J–55

Page 12J–55

A maximum lights off delay of 180 seconds can be set, with the default setting of 1 second. The time delay period resets

to the default value whenever the battery is disconnected or power is removed from the sensor assembly.

The delay period adjustment is possible only when road speed input to the BCM is zero and is dependent on the priority

key system.

Deactivation

Turning the headlamp switch to OFF deactivates the automatic lights system.

Approach Illumination

The approach illumination feature in the BCM turns on the headlamps and / or park lamps for 30 seconds when the doors

are unlocked with the remote coded key.

This provides additional customer security when approaching the vehicle at night. The lights will turn off again if the

vehicle is locked with the remote coded key within 30 seconds of the approach illumination being activated.

When the approach feature is activated, subsequent operation of the remote coded key UNLOCK button will reactivate

the lights to remain on for a further 30 seconds.

The approach illumination feature only operates during dark conditions. The BCM monitors the output of the sun load

sensor and determines when the light levels are low enough to enable the approach illumination feature.

The lights resume normal operation when the ignition is switched to the ON position.

Tech 2 can enable and disable the approach illumination. The customer can also enable or disable the approach

illumination via the instrument cluster MFD, with the trip computer switch, refer to Section 12C Instrumentation.

Circuit Operation – Lights On

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Inputs

Sun Load Sensor Control / Remote Coded Key

The sun load sensor produces a voltage proportional to the amount of ambient light. This voltage can vary between 0 V

and 5 V. The BCM monitors the voltage on A15 – X2 pin 2, circuit 1784 to determine the light level. Tech 2 should be

used to measure the performance of the sun load sensor.

The BCM monitors the input at A15 – X2 pin 1, circuit 218 to determine when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded

key has been pressed.

Ignition Switch ON

The BCM uses this input signal to determine whether the ignition switch is in the IGN or OFF position. W hen the ignition

switch is switched on, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 2 from the ignition switch via circuit 300.

Power Supplies

Battery voltage is applied to the low and high beam relays from fusible link F102, circuit 442 and fuses F30 and F31.

Battery voltage is applied to the park lamp relay from fusible link F102, circuit 442 and fuse F4, circuit 840.

The BCM controls the operation of the exterior lights by switching the internal ground circuits for the relays. If the ambient

light level is low, or the approach illumination has been activated, the BCM energises the ground circuits, turning the

lights on. If the ambient light level is high, the BCM opens the ground circuit, turning the lights off.

Body Control Module Page 12J–56

Page 12J–56

Ground Circuits

High Beam Relay Ground Circuit

The ground circuit for the high beam headlamp relay coil is via circuit 1969, through the headlamp and turn signal control

switch assembly, circuit 10 and through the headlamp switch contacts. From the headlamp switch contacts, it passes

through A15 – X1 pin 6, circuit 103 and then to ground through the internal BCM control circuit.

Low Beam Relay Ground Circuit

The ground circuit for the low beam headlamp relay coil is via circuit 10 and through the headlamp switch contacts. From

the headlamp switch contacts, it passes through circuit 306 to A15 – X2 pin 10. From A15 – X2 pin 10, the circuit is

grounded via an internal BCM control circuit.

Park Lamp Relay Ground Circuit

With the headlamp switch in the AUTO position the ground circuit for the park lamp relay coil is via circuit 13, the closed

park lamp contacts in the headlamp switch, and to ground via circuit 103 to A15 – X1 pin 6. From A15 – X1 pin 6, the

circuit is grounded via an internal BCM control circuit.

Circuit Operation – Lights Off

Inputs

Headlamp Switch Input Signal

The BCM monitors the voltage on A15 – X2 pin 10 to determine the position of the headlamp switch. When the

headlamps or park lamps are on, the voltage at A15 – X2 pin 10 is less than 0.2 V. When the automatic lights system has

turned the lights off, the voltage at A15 – X2 pin 10 will be 12 V. If the headlamp switch is turned off, the voltage at A15 –

X2 pin 10 drops to less than 0.2 V. The BCM sees this low voltage at as a change in status of the headlamp switch and

turns the automatic lights system off. The lights turn back on when another change in switch status occurs.

Driver’s Door Ajar Input Signal

When the driver’s door is open, A15 – X4 pin 19 is grounded via circuit 746 and the driver's door ajar switch. This pulls

the voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 low, to less than 0.2 V. This low voltage at A15 – X4 pin 19 is seen by the BCM as the

driver's door ajar input signal.

Vehicle Speed Signal

The vehicle speed is received from the ECM or PCM via the PIM and the serial data communications bus to the A15 –

X2 pin 5 via circuit 800.

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the ignition switch is in either the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in either the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the A15 – X3 pin 2 from the ignition

switch via circuit 300.

Power Supplies

Battery voltage, through fusible link F102 and circuit 442, is applied to the low beam relay, high beam relay and, if fitted,

fog lamp relay.

Battery voltage is applied to the park lamp relay from fusible link F102 circuit 442 and fuse F4, circuit 840.

The BCM controls the operation of the exterior light circuits by enabling its internal control circuit, which provides the

ground circuit for the relays.

Body Control Module Page 12J–57

Page 12J–57

Ground Circuits

High Beam Relay Ground Circuit

The ground circuit for the high beam headlamp relay is via circuit 1969, through the turn signal and headlamp dip switch

assembly and circuit 10, through the headlamp switch contacts and circuit 306 to A15 – X2 pin 10. From A15 – X2 pin 10,

the circuit is grounded via an internal BCM control circuit.

Low Beam Relay Ground Circuit

With the headlamp switch in the auto position, the ground circuit for the low beam headlamp relay is via circuit 10,

through the headlamp switch contacts and circuit 306 to A15 – X2 pin 10. From A15 – X2 pin 10 the circuit is grounded

via BCM internal switching.

Park Lamps Relay Ground Circuit

With the headlamp switch in the AUTO position, the ground circuit for the low beam headlamp relay is via circuit 10,

through the headlamp switch contacts and circuit 306 to A15 – X2 pin 10. From A15 – X2 pin 10 the circuit is grounded

via an internal BCM control circuit.

Body Control Module Page 12J–58

Page 12J–58

2.14 Instrument Dimming Control

System Operation

The BCM controls the illumination level of the instrument cluster, radio, all dash and centre console illumination and

occupant climate control (OCC), via the secondary serial data bus.

The illumination level is adjusted by moving the spring loaded control lever on the headlamp switch. The lever operates

two momentary contact switches in the headlamp switch. The dimmer drives to full load, giving maximum illumination

intensity, when the ignition is on and the park lamps are switched off.

When the park lamps are switched on, the dimmer operates to the level previously set and provides the voltage variation

compensation required to maintain the same brightness, irrespective of the ignition switch position.

The instrument illumination intensity is also dependent on the priority key system; this intensity can be set for Priority 1

and Priority 2 keys. The setting is recalled when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is pressed, and is

dependent on which priority key is used.

To decrease instrument cluster and trip computer illumination intensity, the switch control lever must be held down for the

required time for the BCM to make the adjustment. To increase illumination intensity, the switch control lever must be

held up until the desired illumination level is reached.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

The BCM controls instrument illumination by regulating the current flow through the instrument illumination circuit. This is

achieved by regulating the ground-circuit duty-cycle, adjusting the on time versus off time. As the on time increases, the

current flowing through the circuit increases. As this current flow increases, illumination intensity increases.

The level of illumination for the instrument cluster and the radio is transmitted on the secondary serial data bus by the

BCM. The instrument and the radio interpret this illumination level and control the illumination accordingly.

Battery voltage is applied to the climate control illumination from the park lamp relay, through fuse F11 and circuit 32.

Battery voltage is applied to the instrument cluster from the ignition switch via fuse F13. The ground circuit for the

illumination is via circuit 230 through A15 – X1 pin 5.

NOTE

Only the instrument cluster, radio and climate

control have SDI controlled variable intensity

lighting. All other switch or dash illumination is

directly connected to Pulse Width Modulation

(PWM) ground from A15 – X1 pin 5.

Body Control Module Page 12J–59

Page 12J–59

Inputs

Park Lamp Switch

When the park lamps are turned on, the park lamps relay coil is grounded through circuit 13, the park lamp switch

contacts, circuit 306, A15 – X2 pin 10 and to ground via an internal switch. Approximately 2.5 V is present at A15 – X2

pin 3 due to the dividing-network dimmer resistors (in the headlamp switch assembly) and the BCM internal resistor. This

indicates to the BCM the park lamps are turned on and the BCM activates internal switching to turn on the instrument

illumination lamps.

Ignition Switch Input Signal

When the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 2 via circuit 300. This

causes the voltage at A15 – X3 pin 2 to increase from less than 0.2 V with the ignition switched OFF to 12 V with the

ignition switched to the IGN or START position. This voltage at A15 – X3 pin 2 is seen by the BCM as the ignition on

input signal.

Instrument Illumination On / Off

A15 – X2 pin 3 is connected to ground when the headlamp switch is in the PARK position. The ground connection is via

circuit 44, two 2.7 kΩ series resistors (in the headlamp switch control lever mechanism), the headlamp switch contacts,

circuit 306, A15 – X2 pin 10 and an internal BCM control circuit.

With the headlamp switch in the OFF position, the voltage at A15 – X2 pin 3 is approximately 8.0 V.

With the headlamp switch in the PARK position, the voltage at the A15 – X2 pin 3 is approximately 2.5 V.

From this, the BCM determines the park lamps are turned on and activates internal switching to turn on the instrument

illumination lamps. When the BCM detects the lamps are turned off, the instrument dimming output is set to full

brightness for the trip computer illumination.

Illumination Brightness

When the headlamp switch control lever is held up, both resistors are shorted and the voltage at A15 – X2 pin 3 is

approximately 0.2 V.

When the headlamp switch control lever is held down, one of the two series resistors are shorted and the voltage at A15

– X2 pin 3 is approximately 1.5 V.

The BCM then controls the instrument illumination level through A15 – X1 pin 5 and circuit 230.

Body Control Module Page 12J–60

Page 12J–60

2.15 Occupant Protection System

Deployment Vehicle Shutdown

System Operation

OPS Deployment Signals

If the occupant protection system (OPS) deploys, the sensing diagnostic module (SDM) sends signals, via the tertiary

serial data bus, to shutdown various vehicle systems. The BCM monitors this serial data via the tertiary serial data bus

and performs the following actions when the specific data signals are identified and the vehicle speed is 0 km/h for longer

than 10 seconds are:

• The dome lamp is turned on continuously.

• All doors are unlocked.

The dome lamps are switched off when the ignition switch is cycled from off to on or when the BCM is reset due to

battery disconnection.

NOTE

The PIM also monitors this serial data via the

tertiary serial data bus and performs a vehicle

shutdown under the same conditions.

NOTE

The OPS Deployment system incorporates

circuits that include inputs and outputs from the

dome lamp control and central door locking and

serial data bus that have been described in

previous BCM sections.

If the dome lamp control and central door locking

systems are functioning correctly and a problem

may exists within the OPS system refer to

Section 12M Occupant Protection System.

Body Control Module Page 12J–61

Page 12J–61

2.16 Priority Key System

Operating Parameters

The BCM remembers two sets of key operating parameters. These operating parameters are recalled when a specific

remote coded key is used. When a Priority 1 remote coded key is used, the BCM recalls the operating parameters

related to the Priority 1 key. When a Priority 2 key is used, the BCM recalls the operating parameters related to the

Priority 2 key.

The operating parameters recalled are for the following functions:

• time delay for automatic headlamps off,

• antenna height memory,

• instrument dimmer level,

• two-stage unlock,

• lock status indicator,

• auto-lock in drive,

• courtesy lamp time delay,

• ignition on courtesy lamp delay,

• accessory control (ignition off or door opening),

• horn chirps,

• speed dependent wipers,

• approach lamp time delay, and

• daylight sensitivity.

These operating parameters are recalled when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is pressed or when the

ignition is turned to the ACC position. All operating parameters are maintained on a last used basis.

Parameter Checks

The BCM also communicates with other modules via the serial data bus, ensuring that each module is in the correct

mode. The following modules use the priority information:

The BCM also communicates with other modules via the serial data bus, ensuring that each module is in the correct

mode. The following modules use the priority information:

• trip computer, mode and overspeed setting,

• occupant climate control settings,

• memory seats,

• power switch position and

• audio system volume, tone and presets.

Body Control Module Page 12J–62

Page 12J–62

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

NOTE

• The priority key system incorporates circuits

that include inputs and outputs from many

BCM systems and the BCM serial data bus

that have been described in previous BCM

sections.

• If all these systems are functioning correctly

and a problem may exists within the priority

key system refer to 5.21 Priority Key System.

When the ignition is switched on or the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is activated, the BCM sends serial data

via the secondary serial data bus to the trip computer and the OCC module and via the primary serial data bus to the

PIM. This serial data indicates to the module whether the Priority 1 key or the Priority 2 key is in use. Each module then

adapts its operating mode to suit the Priority 1 or Priority 2 key settings.

Body Control Module Page 12J–63

Page 12J–63

2.17 Power Antenna Control

System Operation

Two inputs from the BCM control the power antenna:

• Input 1 provides power to the antenna motor.

• Input 2 controls the antenna mast direction (up or down).

The power antenna assembly incorporates maximum and minimum height limit switches and a slip clutch.

Power Antenna

When the BCM senses a radio ON signal, the antenna mast extends to the same height as it was when last in operation

(for the Priority key used) provided the antenna memory height option is enabled. If the battery is disconnected, the

antenna height memory setting defaults to 5 seconds of mast upward travel, which raises the antenna approximately

600 mm.

The antenna mast height memory is dependent on correct battery voltage; a clean antenna mast and no kinks in the

mast drive cord. The height memory is also dependent on the priority key system. A tolerance of plus or minus 100 mm is

acceptable for the mast height.

The antenna mast is moved when an antenna UP or DOWN signal is sensed from the switches on the radio. However,

these switches do not operate if the BCM does not sense the radio ON signal or when the ignition switch is not in either

the ACC or ON position.

The antenna operates as follows when the radio is off:

1 If the ignition is turned off, there is a delay of approximately 15 seconds before the antenna mast fully retracts.

2 If the ignition is turned ACC or to the ON position and the radio is switched off, the antenna mast will fully retract

after 3 seconds.

The antenna mast also retracts when the theft deterrent system is armed or a CD is played.

During engine starting, the radio ON signal is momentarily lost. During this time, the BCM assumes the signal is still

active as it senses ignition and accessories inputs, as well as the radio status signal. This ensures unaffected antenna

operation and control during engine cranking.

Antenna Height – Priority Key System

Antenna height memory can be set and stored for the Priority 1 and Priority 2 keys. When the UNLOCK button on the

remote coded key is pressed, the antenna height is recalled based on the priority key (1 or 2) that is used.

The information for antenna height memory is communicated to the BCM via the secondary serial data bus.

Body Control Module Page 12J–64

Page 12J–64

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Antenna Up Switch Input Signal

When the antenna UP switch is pressed, the radio / CD player sends an antenna UP signal to the BCM via the secondary

serial data bus.

The BCM then applies battery voltage to the antenna direction relay in the power antenna assembly from A15 – X4 pin 7

via circuit 161. This energises the antenna direction relay causing the relay contacts to switch to the antenna UP position.

As battery voltage is also applied to the antenna motor from A15 – X4 pin 23, circuit 160, the antenna motor rotates

driving the antenna mast upward. The ground circuit for the power antenna motor is via the antenna internal ground lead.

Antenna Up Memory Height

When the audio head unit is turned on, battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 10 from the radio via circuit 314. This

causes the voltage at A15 – X3 pin 10 to increase from less than 1.0 V (radio OFF) to battery voltage (radio ON).

This radio ON signal triggers the BCM to apply battery voltage to the antenna direction relay from A15 – X4 pin 7 via

circuit 161. This energises the antenna direction relay, which switches the relay contacts to the antenna UP position. The

BCM also energises its internal relay, which supplies battery voltage to the power antenna motor for enough time to allow

the antenna motor armature to rotate and drive the antenna mast to the same height it was when last operated.

NOTE

If the power supply via fuse F29 to the BCM is

disconnected, antenna memory is lost and will

need to be reset.

Antenna Down

The down travel of the power antenna is also controlled by the BCM. When the antenna down switch is depressed, the

audio head unit sends a DOWN input signal to the BCM through the secondary serial data bus. The BCM does not apply

battery voltage to the antenna direction relay, so the relay contacts remain in the DOWN position. As battery voltage is

applied to the antenna motor from A15 – X4 pin 23, the antenna motor armature rotates, driving the antenna mast down.

Antenna Auto Down

The antenna mast fully retracts when the audio head unit is switched to the off, the theft deterrent system is armed or a

CD is played. The BCM applies a drive voltage from A15 – X4 pin 23 to the antenna motor armature which will cause the

antenna to fully retract within 3 seconds.

Body Control Module Page 12J–65

Page 12J–65

2.18 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System

System Operation

NOTE

Rear Lamp Failure Warning System is only fitted

to Statesman level 4 vehicles. Caprice level 5

vehicles have LED rear stop and tail lamps fitted.

Components Monitored

This system monitors the tail, stop and licence plate lamps for bulb failures, as well as the integrity of the park lamp (F4)

and stop lamp (F5) fuses protecting these systems. The system does not sense trailer lights and will not be affected if

they are connected to the vehicle.

Bulb failures are detected within the following circuit loads (at 12 V):

• Tail lamps – 5 W (2x) = 10 W

• Stop lamps – 21 W (2x) + 18 Watt (1x) = 60 W

• Licence plate lamps – 5 W (2x) = 10 W

A rear lamp bulb or system failure warning is conveyed to the driver via an animated warning display in the MFD of the

instrument cluster with the following indications:

• Steady illumination of the warning icon with tail / park lamps turned on indicates a rear tail-lamp failure.

• Steady illumination of the warning icon while the brake pedal is pressed indicates a rear stop-lamp failure.

• The BCM illuminates the rear lamp warning lamp via the secondary serial data bus if battery voltage is not present

at either A15 – X3 pin 5 or A15 – X3 pin 12 when the ignition is turned to the on position. This determines that one

of the supply fuses has failed.

• The system only operates while the ignition is on but a warning-lamp test of 1.2 seconds is performed when the

ignition is switched on. Detected failures are cleared when the ignition is switched off.

All current warnings in the MFD are displayed in a cycle until the driver acknowledges each by pressing the trip computer

switch MODE button.

NOTE

• If the battery is disconnected during

any service operation, a bulb re-learn

procedure must be carried out. Refer to

6.4 Bulb Re-learn Procedure Rear Lamp

Warning Failure System.

• The ABS (V6) or ABS / TCS (GEN III V8)

must be functional for the rear lamp failure to

operate.

Body Control Module Page 12J–66

Page 12J–66

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

Ground Circuit Monitoring

The BCM monitors the ground circuit current flow to the stop, tail and licence plate lamps. The ground circuit for the stop

and tail lamps is through the BCM between A15 – X4 pin 24 via circuit 1251 and A15 – X1 pin 11 via circuit 151.

Rear Lamp Failure Warning Lamp

When the ignition switch is turned to the on position, battery voltage is applied to the instrument cluster. The instrument

cluster module tests the rear lamp failure warning light by illuminating it for approximately 1.5 seconds. In the event of a

stop, tail or licence plate lamp failure, the BCM sends a serial data signal via the serial data bus to the instrument cluster

module which turns the rear lamp failure light on. A large bulb with a flashing exclamation mark is shown on the MFD in

the instrument cluster.

When the MODE button on the trip computer is pressed, the animated symbol reverts to a small bulb failure icon on the

right of the MFD. For details regarding these warning messages, refer to Section 12C Instrumentation.

Inputs

Park Lamp Fuse

Battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 12 from fuse F4 via circuit 840. If battery voltage is not available at A15 – X3

pin 12 when the ignition switch is in the ON position, the BCM determines the park lamp fuse (or circuit) has failed. The

Rear Lamp Fuse Fail and animated warning will be activated in the MFD of the instrument cluster via the secondary serial

data bus. When the MODE button on the trip computer is pressed, the animated symbol reverts to a small fuse failure

icon on the left of the MFD. The small icon remains illuminated until the problem is rectified.

Park Lamp Switch

When the park lamps are turned on, the instrument dimming series resistors are connected to ground via the park lamp

switch contacts, A15 – X2 pin 10 and an internal BCM transistor switched to ground. The voltage at A15 – X2 pin 3 of the

BCM is approximately 2.5 V, which is seen by the BCM as the park lamps on input signal.

With the park lamps on, the BCM monitors the current flowing from A15 – X4 pin 24 to A15 – X1 pin 11. If the current flow

does not match the learnt current flow, the BCM sends a message via the secondary serial data bus to the instrument

cluster to display the Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

Stop Lamp Fuse

Battery voltage is applied to A15 – X3 pin 5 through circuit 640, and fuse F5. If the battery voltage is not sensed at A15 –

X3 pin 5 when the ignition switch is in the on position, the BCM determines the stop lamp fuse (or circuit) has failed and

displays the animated warning in the MFD of the instrument cluster, via the secondary serial data bus.

Stop Lamp Switch

When the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lamp switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied to the ABS (V6) or

ABS / TCS (GEN III V8) module from fuse F5, through circuit 640, the stop lamp switch contacts and circuit 20. This

action causes the ABS (V6) or ABS / TCS (GEN III V8) module to send a serial data signal to the BCM via the secondary

serial data bus. This serial data is interpreted by the BCM as the stop lamp switch input signal. With the stop lamps on,

the BCM monitors the current flowing between A15 – X4 pin 24 and A15 – X1 pin 11. If the current flow does not match

the learnt current flow, the BCM sends a message via the secondary serial data bus to the MFD in the instrument cluster

to display the Rear Lamp Fuse Fail warning.

Body Control Module Page 12J–67

Page 12J–67

2.19 Hazard Lamp Control

System Operation

Pressing the remote coded key LOCK button to arm the theft deterrent system and lock the doors, signals the BCM to

drive the turn signal lamps to simultaneously flash once. Pressing the LOCK button on the remote again activates the

deadlock function and signals the BCM to turn on the turn signal lamps continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

Pressing the key UNLOCK button signals the BCM to drive the turn signal lamps to simultaneously flash twice.

NOTE

Passive arming of the system does not signal the

BCM to operate the door-locks or flash the turn

signal lamps.

As the hazard-warning switch is activated, the BCM senses the input and uses an internal relay to simultaneously flash

the turn signal lamps.

Circuit Operation

To aid in the following description, refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts.

NOTE

• The circuit diagrams shown are to aid in

interpreting the operation of the circuit and

therefore, only the main connectors and wiring

colours are shown.

• For complete circuits details refer to

either the relevant diagnostic section or

Section 12P Wiring Diagrams.

As the remote coded key is operated it sends an RF signal to the BCM, the BCM senses a valid RF signal. If a valid lock

signal is detected, the BCM will pulse the left side turn signal lamps once via circuit 1314 and the right side turn signal

lamps via circuit 1315.

As the hazard-warning switch is activated, the hazard lamp control input circuit 111 is pulled to ground via A15 – X3

pin 16. The BCM senses this input and drives the internal hazard indicator relay to pulse 12 V to circuits 1314 and 1315.

Power applied to the internal hazard / theft relay is via fuse F7, circuit 140 and A15 – X1 pin 13.

Body Control Module Page 12J–68

Page 12J–68

3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector

Charts

3.1 Wiring Diagrams – V6

Ignition Key, RX Sensor, Common Power and Grounds

Figure 12J – 11

Body Control Module Page 12J–69

Page 12J–69

Accessory Power Circuit

Figure 12J – 12

Body Control Module Page 12J–70

Page 12J–70

UART and GM LAN Communications

Figure 12J – 13

Body Control Module Page 12J–71

Page 12J–71

Central Door Locking

Figure 12J – 14

Body Control Module Page 12J–72

Page 12J–72

Entry Deterrent, Warning Horns and Rear Compartment Solenoid

Figure 12J – 15

Body Control Module Page 12J–73

Page 12J–73

Power Windows

Figure 12J – 16

Body Control Module Page 12J–74

Page 12J–74

Wiper Systems Intermittent Function

Figure 12J – 17

Body Control Module Page 12J–75

Page 12J–75

Dome Lamp Delay Control

Figure 12J – 18

Body Control Module Page 12J–76

Page 12J–76

Automatic Lamp Control

Figure 12J – 19

Body Control Module Page 12J–77

Page 12J–77

Power Antenna Control

Figure 12J – 20

Body Control Module Page 12J–78

Page 12J–78

Rear Lamp Failure System

Figure 12J – 21

Body Control Module Page 12J–79

Page 12J–79

Hazard Lamp Control, Theft / Turn Signal Lamp Flasher

Figure 12J – 22

Body Control Module Page 12J–80

Page 12J–80

3.2 Connector Charts – V6

Figure 12J – 23

Body Control Module Page 12J–81

Page 12J–81

Figure 12J – 24

Body Control Module Page 12J–82

Page 12J–82

Figure 12J – 25

Body Control Module Page 12J–83

Page 12J–83

Figure 12J – 26

Body Control Module Page 12J–84

Page 12J–84

3.3 Wiring Diagrams – GEN III V8

Ignition Key, RX Sensor, Common Power and Grounds

Figure 12J – 27

Body Control Module Page 12J–85

Page 12J–85

Accessory Power Circuit

Figure 12J – 28

Body Control Module Page 12J–86

Page 12J–86

UART and Class 2 Communications

Figure 12J – 29

Body Control Module Page 12J–87

Page 12J–87

Central Door Locking

Figure 12J – 30

Body Control Module Page 12J–88

Page 12J–88

Entry Deterrent, Warning Horns and Rear Compartment Solenoid

Figure 12J – 31

Body Control Module Page 12J–89

Page 12J–89

Power Windows

Figure 12J – 32

Body Control Module Page 12J–90

Page 12J–90

Wiper Systems Intermittent Function

Figure 12J – 33

Body Control Module Page 12J–91

Page 12J–91

Dome Lamp Delay Control

Figure 12J – 34

Body Control Module Page 12J–92

Page 12J–92

Automatic Lamp Control

Figure 12J – 35

Body Control Module Page 12J–93

Page 12J–93

Power Antenna Control

Figure 12J – 36

Body Control Module Page 12J–94

Page 12J–94

Rear Lamp Failure System

Figure 12J – 37

Body Control Module Page 12J–95

Page 12J–95

Hazard Lamp Control, Theft / Turn Signal Lamp Flasher

Figure 12J – 38

Body Control Module Page 12J–96

Page 12J–96

3.4 Connector Charts – GEN III V8

Figure 12J – 39

Body Control Module Page 12J–97

Page 12J–97

Figure 12J – 40

Body Control Module Page 12J–98

Page 12J–98

Figure 12J – 41

Body Control Module Page 12J–99

Page 12J–99

Figure 12J – 42

Body Control Module Page 12J–100

Page 12J–100

3.5 Connector Information

BCM Location and Wiring Connectors

Figure 12J – 43

BCM Connector Pin Identification

The following tables represent the connector wiring for the various models of BCM. An explanation of these terms follows

these tables.

A15 Connector X1

No. Description Circuit Wire Colour Active

Signal Circuit

Type

X1–1 Front wiper park switch 196 YE Switch to B+ O

X1–2 Intermittent front wiper motor power 243 BN / WH ACC and IGN P

X1–3 Right turn signal lamp drive 1315 BU Switch to B+ O

X1–4 Left turn signal lamp drive 1314 L-BU Switch to B+ O

X1–5 Instrument illumination drive 230 GY Switch to GND O

X1–6 Auto headlamps on ground 103 WH / RD Switch to GND PD/O

X1–7 Not used — — — —

X1–8 Power window drive 1351 YE Switch to GND PD/O

X1–9 Accessories relay 755 BN / BK Switch to GND PD/O

X1–10 Battery power (+) 740 OG / BK Always active P

X1–11 Power ground 151 BK / GN GRD GND

X1–12 Front wiper drive 96 GN Switch to GND PD/O

Body Control Module Page 12J–101

Page 12J–101

A15 Connector X1

No. Description Circuit Wire Colour Active

Signal Circuit

Type

X1–13 Internal BCM relay battery power 140 OG / RD Always active P

X1–14 Receiver ground 219 BN / GN GND GND

X1–15 Not used — — — —

X1–16 Interior illumination relay 1393 WH Switch to GND PD/O

X1–17 Horn drive 28 BK / YE Switch to GND PD/O

X1–18 Not used — — — —

X1–19 Not used — — — —

X1–20 Electronic ground 251 BK / YE GRD GND

X1–21 Security status LED 264 L-BU Switch to GND O

X1–22 Door-lock power 440 OG / PU Always active P

A15 Connector X2

No. Description Circuit Wire Colour Active

Signal Circuit

Type

X2–1 Receiver data 218 YE COMMS I

X2–2 Twilight level 1784 YE / BK 0 – 5 V I

X2–3 Instrument dim setting 44 WH 0 – 5 V PUI

X2–4 Wiper dwell level 477 GY / BK 0 – 5 V PUI

X2–5 Primary serial data bus 800 RD / BK COMMS I/O

X2–6 Tertiary serial data bus 774 WH / GN COMMS I/O

X2–7 Slip ring 1073 PU / RD COMMS I/O

X2–8 Not used — — — —

X2–9 Secondary UART serial data bus 1061 GN / WH COMMS I/O

X2–10 Auto headlamps off 306 BK Switch to GND PD/O

X2–11 Hood pull up 109 RD / WH RES to B+ PPU

X2–12 Not used — — — —

A15 Connector X3

Pin No. Description Circuit W i re Colour Active

Circuit Circuit

Type

X3–1 Battery ground 150 BK Always GND GND

X3–2 Ignition power 300 OG Pull to B+ PD,P

X3–3 Front intermittent wiper / washer position 112 BU / WH Pull to B+ PPD

X3–4 Accessories power 4 BN / WH Pull to B+ PD,P

X3–5 Stop lamp fuse 640 OG / BU Pull to B+ PPD

X3–6 Not used — — — —

X3–7 Not used — — — —

Body Control Module Page 12J–102

Page 12J–102

A15 Connector X3

Pin No. Description Circuit W i re Colour Active

Circuit Circuit

Type

X3–8 Boot unlock request 1576 BK / RD Pull to GND PPU

X3–9 Not used — — — —

X3–10 Radio on 314 YE / RD Pull to B+ PPD

X3–11 Hood open 263 YE / BK Pull to GRD PPD

X3–12 Park lamp sense 840 OG / WH Pull to B+ PPD

X3–13 Front wash / wipe 228 L-BU Pull to B+ PPD

X3–14 Not used — — — —

X3–15 Theft horn drive 1149 GN Switch to B+ O

X3–16 Hazard lamps 111 BN Pull to GND PPU

A15 Connector X4

Pin No. Description Circuit Wire Colour Active

Signal Circuit

Type

X4–1 Passenger door unlock drive 294 BK / RD Switch to B+ PPU

X4–2 Boot solenoid 56 RD / GN Switch to B+ PPU

X4–3 Dome light switch door 328 YE / BU Pull to B+ PPD

X4–4 Passenger’s door ajar 745 WH Pull to GND PPU

X4–5 Passenger door unlock request 194 BN / OG Pull to GND PPU

X4–6 Boot switch 744 YE / GN Pull to GND PPU

X4–7 Antenna direction 161 GY Switch to B+ O

X4–8 Driver’s door unlock drive 694 BU / BK Switch to B+ O

X4–9 Deadlock drive 5171 PU / WH Switch to B+ O

X4–10 All door lock drive 295 BK / YE Switch to B+ O

X4–11 Passenger window power source 638 OG / YE Active via switch P

X4–12 Driver window down request 167 GN / BK Pull to B+ PPD

X4–13 Driver window motor 667 GN / OG Switch to B+ O

X4–14 Driver window up request 666 BU / WH Pull to B+ PPD

X4–15 Passenger window up request 164 GN Pull to B+ PPD

X4–16 Driver’s door unlock request 781 L-GN / YE Pull to GND PPU

X4–17 Deadbolt request 780 BN / WH Pull to GND PPU

X4–18 Not Used — — — —

X4–19 Driver’s door ajar 746 GY / WH Pull to B+ PPU

X4–20 Lock request 195 BN / RD Pull to B+ PPU

X4–21 Dome light switch on 157 PU Pull to B+ PPD

X4–22 Dome light drive 660 WH / GN Switch to GND O

X4–23 Antenna drive 160 GN Switch to B+ O

X4–24 Stop / tail light sensor 1251 BN / WH GND return PD

Body Control Module Page 12J–103

Page 12J–103

A15 Connector X4

Pin No. Description Circuit Wire Colour Active

Signal Circuit

Type

X4–25 Passenger side window motor 165 YE Switch to B+ O

X4–26 Passenger window down request 1136 BU Pull to B+ PPD

Legend – Circuit Type

GND Ground PD Pull Down PU Pull Up

O Output I Input PPU Pulsed Pull Up

P Power I/O Input / Output PPD Pulsed Pull Down

Explanation of Terms

For terms used in the Active Signal column, the description of these is provided below.

Active Signal Description

Pull to B+ The BCM terminal has battery voltage applied to it through an external device such as a

motor winding. It operates this device by pulling its voltage to ground through an internal

switching transistor.

Pull to GND This BCM terminal usually has an external switch connected to it, which applies a vehicle

ground to the terminal when pressed.

ACC and IGN Battery voltage associated when either of these Ignition switch positions is selected appears

here.

Switch to B+ The BCM terminal has internally switched battery voltage applied to it.

Switch to GND The BCM terminal switches to ground whatever is connected to it via an internal transistor.

Always Active This terminal generally has a permanent battery or ground connection applied to it.

COMMS Serial data communications takes place on these terminals.

0 – 5 V Varying voltage variations occur on these terminals over the range of voltage specified.

RES to B+ This term applies to the hood resistance divider circuit that is used to determine the state of

security within the engine compartment.

Active via switch These BCM terminals have battery voltage applied to them when the switch connected to

them is operated.

GND return The BCM terminal connects the rear stop lamps through a current sensing resistor to

vehicle ground to determine if a lamp has failed or not.

Body Control Module Page 12J–104

Page 12J–104

4 Tech 2 Information

4.1 Connecting Tech 2 for System Diagnosis

Tech 2 (4) with the appropriate software, cables (3) and

adaptors (2), is capable of reading the BCM serial data when

connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (1). The DLC is

connected to the instrument panel lower right-hand trim, to

the right of the steering column.

For additional general information on connecting and

operating Tech 2, refer to Section 0C Tech 2.

Figure 12J – 44

Body Control Module Page 12J–105

Page 12J–105

4.2 Tech 2 Test Modes and Displays

A prerequisite of this diagnostic section is for the user to be familiar with the proper use of Tech 2. The following

pages illustrate only the major Tech 2 screen displays and provide a brief explanation of their function for diagnosing

the BCM system. If additional information is required on the operation of Tech 2, reference should be made to either

Section 0C Tech 2 or the Tech 2 User’s Guide.

With the ignition turned off, connect the Tech 2 to the Data Link Connector (DLC) using the DLC Adaptor, refer to either

Section 0C Tech 2 or the Tech 2 User’s Guide.

Body Control Module Page 12J–106

Page 12J–106

4.3 Normal Mode

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Normal Mode

The Normal Mode data list is used to view serial data being sent to and from the BCM. The Normal Mode data list is as

follows.

Tech 2 Display Range Remarks

Ignition Switch Off = 0 V

On = 12 V Displays the current status of the ignition switch.

Ignition Off Time XX min Displays the length of time in minutes since the ignition was

last switched off.

Accessories Switch On / Off Displays the current status of the accessories switch.

Instrument Lamps 0% – 100% Displays the instrument cluster illumination level.

Lights On Yes / No Displays the current status of the headlamp switch.

Sun Load Between 0 and 254 Displays the ambient light level as detected by the sun sensor.

Rear Compartment Closed / Open Displays the status of the rear compartment lid switch.

Rear Lamp Fuse Fail Okay / Failed Displays the status of the rear lamp fuse.

Rear Brake Bulb Fail Okay / Failed Displays the status of the stop lamps.

Rear Lamp Bulb Fail Okay / Failed Displays the status of the rear park lamps.

Front Wiper Status On / Off Displays the status of the front wiper drive.

Alarm Inactive / Triggered Indicates if an alarm has been activated.

Alarm Trigger Source Driver’s Door / Passenger’s

Door / Rear Compartment /

Bonnet / Ignition / Not

Detected

Indicates the source of a triggered alarm.

Key Priority 1 / 2 Displays the priority key in use.

BCM DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set Indicates if any BCM DTC have been set.

MFD Message

(Multi-Function Display) Yes / No Indicates when a message is sent to the instrument cluster.

Body Control Module Page 12J–107

Page 12J–107

4.4 Diagnostic Trouble Codes

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Read DTC Information

• From the Diagnostic Trouble Codes screen, select Read DTC Information and press the Enter key.

• Refer to 5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List.

• Press the Exit key to return to the Diagnostic Trouble Codes screen.

Each DTC is allocated a number from 0 to 29.

Read Alarm Codes

• From the Diagnostic Trouble Codes screen, select Read Alarm Codes and press the Enter key.

• Only History Alarm Codes are displayed. Information on the number of times the Alarm has occurred and the

number of ignition cycles since the last occurrence are not displayed.

• Press the Exit key to return to the Diagnostic Trouble Codes screen.

Clear DTC and Alarm Codes

• From the Diagnostic Trouble Codes screen, select Clear DTCs and Alarm Codes and press the Enter key.

• Confirm the action as instructed by Tech 2.

NOTE

Tech 2 will display Clear DTCs and Alarm Codes

Failed if any DTC or Alarm Codes are still current.

Body Control Module Page 12J–108

Page 12J–108

4.5 Data Display

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display

The Data Display screen provides a further breakdown to individual data lists for the following BCM functions.

The serial data for each function can be viewed by selecting the item and pressing the Enter key. The list can be scrolled

by using the Up and Down arrow keys. Press the Exit key to exit the data list.

• Inputs and Outputs • Central Door Locking • Rear Lamp F ailure

• BCM Internal Status • Power Windows • Antenna

• Serial Data Inputs • Wipers • Interior Illumination

• Priority 1 User Settings • Headlamps • System Identification

• Priority 2 User Settings • Instrument Illumination • User Settings

• Alarm / Theft Deterrent

Inputs and Outputs

The Inputs and Outputs data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Accessory Relay On / Off

Interior Illumination Relay On / Off

Slip Ring Enabled Yes / No

Remote Key Function Boot Release Request / Lock Request / Unlock Request

Remote Key Number 1 / 2

Remote Key Status Valid Key / Invalid Code

Remote Key Priority 1 / 2

Key Priority Signal 1 / 2

Driver's Door Open / Closed

Passenger Doors Open / Closed

Bonnet Open / Closed

Rear Compartment Status Open / Closed

Rear Compartment Release Switch On / Off

Rear Compartment Solenoid Drive On / Off

Driver’s Door Unlock Switch On / Off

Passenger Door Unlock Switch On / Off

Lock Switch On / Off

Body Control Module Page 12J–109

Page 12J–109

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Deadlock Switch On / Off

Driver’s Door Unlock Drive On / Off

Passenger Door Unlock Drive On / Off

Door Lock Drive On / Off

Deadlock Drive On / Off

Horn On / Off

Indicators On / Off

Hazard Warning Switch On / Off

Theft Deterrent Horn On / Off

Security LED On / Off

Power Window Relay Disabled / Enabled

Right Front Window Switch Off / Down / Up / Invalid

Right Front Window Auto Down Inactive / Active

Left Front Window Switch Off / Up / Down / Invalid

Left Front Window Auto Down Inactive / Active

Front Wiper Intermittent Switch On / Off

Front Wiper Intermittent Switch Voltage Volts

Intermittent Wiper Drive On / Off

Front Washer Pump Switch On / Off

Front Wiper Park Switch On / Off

Headlamp Switch On / Off

Headlamp Drive On / Off

Auto Headlamp Drive On / Off

Ambient Light Lux

Sun Load W/m2

Dome Lamp Switch On / Off / Door / Invalid

Dome Lamp Drive On / Off

Instrument Illumination Switch Off / Down / Up / Invalid

Instrument Illumination Switch Voltage Volts

Instrument Illumination Level % 35 – 100%

Rear Brake Lamp Fuse Failed / Okay

Rear Park Lamp Fuse Failed / Okay

Rear Brake Lamp Current Amps

Rear Park Lamp Current Amps

Radio Status On / Off

Antenna Off / Down / Up

Serial Data Bus Isolation Normal / Data Cutoff

Body Control Module Page 12J–110

Page 12J–110

BCM Internal Status

The BCM Internal Status data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Headlamp Switch On / Off

Right Front Window Auto Down Yes / No

Right Front Window Auto Down Timer Seconds

Left Front Window Auto Down Yes / No

Left Front Window Auto Down Timer Seconds

Filtered Ambient Light Lux

Filtered Sun Load W/m2

Front Wiper Dwell Time Seconds

Central Door Locking Unlocked / Unlocking / Locked / Locking / Deadlocked /

Undeadlocking / Deadlocking / Driver’s Door Unlocking /

Unlocking Door / Locking Failed / Unlocking Failed / Driver

Unlocking Failed

Rear Park and Brake Lamp Current A

Rear Park Lamp Current A

Rear Brake Lamp Current A

Instrument Illumination Switch Off / Down / Up / Invalid

Instrument Illumination Level % 35 – 100%

Antenna Height Target Seconds

Antenna Height Setting Seconds

Auto Lights Delay Seconds

Pre Delivery Mode Disabled / Enabled

Battery Saver Shutdown Time Minutes

Autolock in Drive Yes / No

Antenna Height Memory On / Off

Door Lock Indication Turn signal lamps / Horn and Turn signal lamps

Security Status Passive Armed / Disarmed / Armed / Triggered

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–111

Page 12J–111

Serial Data Inputs

The Serial Data Inputs data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

NOTE

Tech 2 will display PCM Theft Status when

diagnostics checks are performed on V6 vehicles.

Read as ECM Theft Status.

Tech 2 Strings Unit Range

Vehicle Speed km/h

PRNDL Switch • Invalid / L / 2 / 3 / D / N / R / P (4 speed automatic)

• Invalid / L / 2 / 3 / 4 / D / N / R / P (5 speed automatic)

PCM Theft Status Start / No Start

SRS Deployed This Ignition Cycle Yes / No

Radio On / Off

Antenna Required Yes / No

Antenna Switch Off / Down / Up

Stop Lamp Switch On / Off

Priority 1 User Settings

The Priority 1 User Settings data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Instrument Illumination Level % 35 – 100%

Antenna Height Memory Seconds

Approach Illumination Seconds 0 to 90

Headlamps Auto Off Delay Seconds 0 to 180

Interior Lamp Timeout Seconds 0 to 255

Ignition Off Interior Lamp Timeout Seconds 0 to 255

Two Stage Unlock Yes / No

Door Lock Indication Turn signal lamps / Horn and Turn signal lamps

Autolock in Drive Yes / No

Accessory Relay Timeout Ignition Off / Driver’s Door

Auto Headlamps Early / Normal / Late

Body Control Module Page 12J–112

Page 12J–112

Priority 2 User Settings

The Priority 2 User Settings data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Ran ge

Instrument Illumination Level % 35 – 100%

Antenna Height Memory Seconds

Approach Illumination Seconds 0 to 90

Headlamps Auto Off Delay Seconds 0 to 180

Interior Lamp Timeout Seconds 0 to 255

Ignition Off Interior Lamp Timeout Seconds 0 to 255

Two Stage Unlock Yes / No

Door Lock Indication Turn signal lamps / Horn and Turn signal lamps

Autolock in Drive Yes / No

Accessory Relay Timeout Ignition Off / Driver’s Door

Auto Headlamps Early / Normal / Late

Alarm / Theft Deterrent

The Alarm / Theft Deterrent data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Slip Ring Enabled Yes / No

Remote Key Function Boot Release Request / Lock Request / Unlock Request

Remote Key Number 1 / 2

Remote Key Status Valid Key / Invalid Code

Driver's Door Open / Closed

Passenger Doors Open / Closed

Bonnet Open / Closed

Rear Compartment Status Open / Closed

Horn On / Off

Indicators On / Off

Theft Deterrent Horn On / Off

Security LED On / Off

Security Status Passive Armed / Disarmed / Armed / Triggered

PCM Theft Status Start / No Start

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–113

Page 12J–113

Central Door Locking

The Central Door Locking data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Strings Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Slip Ring Enabled Yes / No

Remote Key Function Boot Release Request / Lock Request / Unlock Request

Remote Key Number 1 / 2

Remote Key Status Valid Key / Invalid Code

Remote Key Priority 1 / 2

Key Priority Signal 1 / 2

Driver's Door Open / Closed

Passenger Doors Open / Closed

Bonnet Open / Closed

Rear Compartment Status Closed / Open

Rear Compartment Release Switch On / Off

Rear Compartment Solenoid Drive On / Off

Central Door Locking Unlocked / Unlocking / Locked / Locking / Deadlocked /

Undeadlocking / Deadlocking / Driver’s Door Unlocking /

Unlocking Door / Locking Failed / Unlocking Failed / Driver

Unlocking Failed

Driver’s Door Unlock Switch On / Off

Passenger’s Door Unlock Switch On / Off

Lock Switch On / Off

Deadlock Switch On / Off

Driver’s Door Unlock Drive On / Off

Passenger Doors Unlock Drive On / Off

Door Lock Drive On / Off

Deadlock Drive On / Off

Autolock in Drive Yes / No

Horn On / Off

Indicators On / Off

Security LED On / Off

Door Lock Indication Turn signal lamps / Horn and Turn signal lamps

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–114

Page 12J–114

Power Windows

The Power Windows data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Power Window Relay Disabled / Enabled

Right Front Window Switch Off / Down / Up / Invalid

Right Front Window Auto Down Inactive / Active

Right Front Window Auto Down Timer Seconds

Left Front Window Switch Off / Up / Down / Invalid

Left Front Window Auto Down Inactive / Active

Left Front Window Auto Down Timer Seconds

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Wipers

The Wipers data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Strings Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Accessory Relay On / Off

Front Wiper Intermittent Switch On / Off

Intermittent Wiper Drive On / Off

Front Wiper Intermittent Switch Voltage Volts

Front Wiper Dwell Time Seconds

Front Washer Pump Switch On / Off

Front Wiper Park Switch On / Off

PRNDL Switch • Invalid / L / 2 / 3 / D / N / R / P (4 speed automatic)

• Invalid / L / 2 / 3 / 4 / D / N / R / P (5 speed automatic)

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–115

Page 12J–115

Headlamps

The Headlamps data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Ran ge

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Headlamp Switch On / Off

Headlamp Drive On / Off

Auto Headlamp Drive On / Off

Ambient Light Lux

Sun Load W/m2

Auto Lights Delay Seconds

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Instrument Illumination

The Instrument Illumination data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Headlamp Switch On / Off

Instrument Illumination Switch Off / Down / Up / Invalid

Instrument Illumination Switch Voltage Volts

Instrument Illumination Level % 35 – 100%

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–116

Page 12J–116

Interior Illumination

The Interior Illumination data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Strings Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Interior Illumination Relay On / Off

Driver's Door Open / Closed

Passenger Doors Open / Closed

Dome Lamp Switch On / Off / Door / Invalid

Dome Lamp Drive On / Off

Pre Delivery Mode Disabled / Enabled

Battery Saver Shutdown Time Minutes

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Rear Lamp Failure

The Rear Lamp Failure data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Ran ge

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Rear Brake Lamp Fuse Failed / Okay

Rear Park Lamp Fuse Failed / Okay

Rear Park and Brake Lamp Current Amps

Rear Park Lamp Current Amps

Rear Brake Lamp Current Amps

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

Body Control Module Page 12J–117

Page 12J–117

Antenna

The Antenna data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 Display Unit Range

Battery Voltage Volts

Ignition Switch On / Off

Accessory Switch On / Off

Accessory Relay On / Off

Radio Status On / Off

Antenna Off / Down / Up

Antenna Height Target Seconds

Antenna Height Setting Seconds

DTC Status No DTC / DTCs Set

System Identification

The System Identification data list is as follows. Press the Exit key at any time to return to the Data Display screen.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Tech 2 display Unit Ran ge

Identifier BCM Diagnostic Data Identifier

0301 = Lux, 0401 = High

Partnumber Eight-digit number

Software Version Number Six-digit number

Production Date Six-digit number

TAG Number The last six digits of the Vehicle Ident ification Number

(VIN).

VAP Process Number Two-digit number indicating if programming was EOL (12)

or by Tech 2 (99).

Barcode (BCM Level) BCM Level

YA = Low, YB = Mid, YD = Lux, YF = High

Barcode (Serial Number) BCM Serial Number

Body Control Module Page 12J–118

Page 12J–118

4.6 Snapshot

Tech 2 can be used to record system information that is occurring at a particular moment in time, before and after a

forced manual trigger, and this is called a snapshot. For more details, refer to Section 0C, Tech 2.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Snapshot

Tech 2 will then display the Inputs and Outputs data list.

• Scroll through the data list using the Up and Down arrow keys.

• Make the required selection and press the Enter key to continue.

Body Control Module Page 12J–119

Page 12J–119

4.7 Miscellaneous Tests

Tech 2 can be used to verify correct operation of the various BCM functions to assist in isolating a fault condition. Tech 2

can be used to force various functions on or off and monitors the response.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

• Scroll through the Miscellaneous Tests list using the Up and Down arrow keys.

NOTE

Only the Miscellaneous Tests relevant to the level

of BCM installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

• Make the required selection and press the Enter key to continue.

NOTE

Some Miscellaneous Tests will set DTC’s. On

completion of a test, ensure that any DTC

set during the test are cleared. Refer to

4.4 Diagnostic Trouble Codes.

Lamps

The Lamps tests are performed using Tech 2 and allow the switching of various lamps to verify correct operation.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

Whilst Tech 2 screens displays and makes

reference to “Indicators”, the service information

and diagnostics tables naming is “Turn Signal

Lamps”.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Lamps

Scroll through the Lamps list using the Up and Down arrow keys. Make the required selection and press the Enter key to

continue.

Interior Lamp

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Interior Lamp.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the interior lamp at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the interior lamp. Verify the interior lamp status on the Tech 2

display also changes as the lamp is turned on and off. If the interior lamp fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.17 Dome Lamp Delay Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–120

Page 12J–120

Headlamps

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Headlamps.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the headlamps at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the headlamps. Verify the status of the headlamps on the Tech 2

display also changes as the headlamps are turned on and off. If the headlamps fail to operate as expected, refer to

5.18 Automatic Lamp Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Indicators

NOTE

Whilst Tech 2 screens displays and makes

reference to “Indicators”, the service information

and diagnostics tables naming is “Turn Signal

Lamps”.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight: Indicators.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the indicators at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the indicators. Verify the status of the indicators on the Tech 2

display also changes as the indicators are turned on and off. Note that when turned on using the Tech 2 soft

key, the indicators will extinguish after a few seconds. If the indicators fail to operate as expected, refer to.

5.24 Hazard Lamp Control

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Instrument Illumination

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Instrument Illumination.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the instrument illumination at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the Increase and Decrease soft keys on Tech 2 to vary the illumination level and verify the illumination level of

the instruments changes accordingly. Verify the illumination level status on the Tech 2 display also changes as the

illumination level is increased and decreased. If the instrument illumination fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.19 Instrument Dimming Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Auto Lights On

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Auto Lights On.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the Auto Lights On function at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the Auto Lights On function. Verify the status of the Auto Lights On

function on the Tech 2 display also changes as the headlamps are turned on and off. If the auto lights on function

fails to operate as expected, refer to 5.18 Automatic Lamp Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–121

Page 12J–121

Rear Lamp Bulb Fail

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the rear lamp bulb at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the rear lamp bulb monitoring circuit. Verify the status of the rear

lamp bulb on the Tech 2 display also changes as the lights are turned on and off. Note that a chime will sound

when the On soft key is pressed. If the rear lamp bulb fail function does not operate as expected, refer to

5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Fail

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Fail.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the rear stop lamp bulbs at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the rear stop lamp bulbs monitoring circuit. Verify the status of the

rear lamp bulb on the Tech 2 display also changes as the lights are turned on and off. Note that a chime will sound

when the On soft key is pressed. If the rear stop lamp bulb fail function does not operate as expected, refer to

5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Rear Lamp Fuse Fail

NOTE

The rear lamp fuse circuit monitors the correct

operation of both the stop lamps fuse and the

park lamps fuse.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Rear Lamp Fuse Fail.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the rear lamp fuse monitoring circuit at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the rear stop lamp fuse monitoring circuit. Verify the status of

the fuse on the Tech 2 display also changes as the test is conducted. Note that a chime will sound when the

On soft key is pressed. If the rear stop lamp fuse fail function does not operate as expected, refer to

5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Lamps screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–122

Page 12J–122

Data Bus Isolator

The Data Bus Isolator test is performed using Tech 2. T he data bus isolator is a switch located in the BCM and can be

forced open or closed by Tech 2. In the open position, the switch isolates the secondary data bus and the tertiary data

bus from the primary serial data bus.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Data Bus

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current data bus isolator status at the bottom of the screen.

• With the engine running, press the Cutoff soft key every 2 seconds for a period in excess of 10 seconds and verify

the SRS warning indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates.

• Press the Normal soft key to ensure the data bus isolator is in the closed position. If the data bus isolator function

fails to operate as expected, refer to 5.9 Serial Data Communications.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

NOTE

If the SRS warning indicator illuminates,

this will also cause the SDM to set a DTC. Ensure

that all DTC are cleared. Refer to

Section 12M Occupant Protection System.

Central Locking

The Central Locking test is performed using Tech 2 and tests the operation of all door lock actuators.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Central Locking

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the central locking system at the bottom of the screen.

• Press the Lock Deadlock soft key and check that all doors lock. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

indicates Locked.

• Press the Lock Deadlock soft key again and listen for the sound of the deadlock actuator operating. Verify the

status indicated on the Tech 2 screen indicates Deadlocked.

• Press the Unlock Drv./All soft key and check the driver’s door (two-stage unlock selected) or all doors unlock. Verify

the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen indicates D D Unlocked (two-stage unlock selected) or Unlocked. If two-

stage unlock is selected, press the Unlock Drv./All soft key again and check that all doors are now unlocked. If the

central locking function fails to operate as expected, refer 5.12 Central Door Locking.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Rear Compartment

The Rear Compartment test is performed using Tech 2 and tests the operation of the rear compartment lid release

solenoid.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Rear Compartment

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the rear compartment lid release solenoid at the bottom of the

screen.

• Press the Open soft key and check the solenoid operates and opens the rear compartment. Verify the status

indicated on the Tech 2 screen indicates Open.

• Close the rear compartment lid and verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes to Closed. If the rear

compartment release solenoid fails to operate as expected, refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–123

Page 12J–123

Wipers

The Wiper tests are performed using Tech 2, and allow the switching of the front and rear wipers to verify their correct

operation.

NOTE

Only the tests relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Wipers

Scroll through the Wipers list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required test, press the Enter key.

Front Wipers

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Front Wipers.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the front wipers at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the front wipers. Verify the status of the front wipers on the Tech 2

display also changes as the wipers are turned on and off. If the front wipers fail to operate as expected, refer to

5.16 Wiper Systems Intermittent Function.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Wiper Tests screen.

Power Windows

The power Windows tests are performed using Tech 2 and allow the testing of the power windows to verify correct

operation.

NOTE

Only the tests relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Power Window s

Scroll through the Power Windows list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required test, press the Enter

key.

Driver’s Window Auto down

The Driver’s Window Auto down test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies the correct operation of the driver’s window

and associated circuit.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Driver Window.

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the driver’s window auto down signal at the bottom of the screen.

• Press the Down soft key and check the window lowers completely. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

indicates Active.

• Raise the window.

• Press the Down soft key again. As the window is lowering, press the Stop soft key and check the window stops.

Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes to Inactive. If the driver’s window auto down test function

fails to operate as expected, refer to. 5.15 Power Window System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–124

Page 12J–124

Front Passenger’s Window Auto down

The Front Passenger’s Window Auto down test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies the correct operation of the front

passenger’s window and associated circuit.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Front Passenger’s Window.

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the front passenger’s window auto down signal at the bottom of

the screen.

• Press the Down soft key and check the window lowers completely. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

indicates Active.

• Raise the window.

• Press the Down soft key again. As the window is lowering, press the Stop soft key and check the window stops.

Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes to Inactive. If the front passenger’s window auto down

test function fails to operate as expected, refer to. 5.15 Power Window System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Power Window Relay

The Power Window Relay test is performed using Tech 2 and allows the testing of the power windows and associated

circuits to verify their correct operation.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Pow er Window Relay.

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the power window relay at the bottom of the screen.

• While raising or lowering the driver’s window, press the Disable soft key and check the window stops. Verify the

status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes to Disabled.

• Press the Enable soft key and check the window commences to move again. Verify the status indicated on the

Tech 2 screen changes to Enabled. If the power window relay test function fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.15 Power Window System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Antenna

The Antenna test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies the correct operation of the power antenna and associated

circuit.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Antenna

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the antenna at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the Up and Down soft keys to raise and lower the antenna. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

changes as the antenna is raised and lowered. If the antenna test function fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.22 Power Antenna Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–125

Page 12J–125

Horn

The Horn test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies correct operation of the horn and associated circuit.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Horn

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the horn at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys to test the horn operation. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes

as the horn is operated. If the horn test function fails to operate as expected, refer to 5.14 Entry Deterrent System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Interior Illumination Relay

The Interior Illumination Relay test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies the correct operation of the interior light and

associated circuit.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Interior Illumination Relay

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the interior illumination relay at the bottom of the screen.

• Press the On soft key and check the interior lights illuminate. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

changes to On.

• Press the Off soft key and check the interior lights extinguish. Verify the status indicated on the Tech 2 screen

changes to Off. If the interior illumination relay test function fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.17 Dome Lamp Delay Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Accessory Relay

The Accessory Relay test is performed using Tech 2 and verifies the correct operation of the accessory relay and

associated circuit.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Accessory Relay

• Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2 screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the accessory relay at the bottom of the screen.

• With the audio system operating, press the Off soft key and check the audio system stops operating. Verify the

status indicated on the Tech 2 screen changes to Off.

• Press the On soft key and check the audio system resumes operation. Verify the status indicated on the

Tech 2 screen changes to On. If the accessory relay test function fails to operate as expected, refer to

5.11 Accessory Power Control.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Miscellaneous Tests screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–126

Page 12J–126

Security System

The Security System tests are performed using Tech 2 and allow the testing of the vehicle anti-theft system to verify

correct operation.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Security System

Scroll through the Security System list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required test, press the Enter

key.

Security LED

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Security LED.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the Security LED at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the operation of the LED. Verify the status of the LED on the Tech 2

display also changes as the Security LED is turned on and off. If the Security LED test function fails to operate as

expected, refer to 5.13 Theft Deterrent System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Security System screen.

Theft Deterrent Horn

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Theft Deterrent Horn.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current status of the theft deterrent horn at the bottom of the screen.

• Use the On and Off soft keys on Tech 2 to test the operation of the theft deterrent horn. Verify the status of the horn

on the Tech 2 display also changes as the theft deterrent horn is turned on and off. If the theft deterrent horn fails to

operate as expected, refer to 5.14 Entry Deterrent System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Security System screen.

Key Priority

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through the list and highlight Key Priority.

• Press the Enter key to select the test function. Follow any test precondition instructions as detailed on the Tech 2

screen.

• Once the test function has been highlighted and selected, Tech 2 will display the current serial data associated with

the selected test function and the current key priority status at the bottom of the screen.

• With the audio system operating, use the Priority 1 and Priority 2 soft keys on Tech 2 to test the operation of the

key priority function. As the soft keys are pressed the audio system will change to reflect the priority key chosen. If

the key priority function fails to operate as expected, refer to 5.21 Priority Key System.

• Press the Quit soft key or the Exit key to exit the test and return to the Security System screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–127

Page 12J–127

4.8 Program

The Tech 2 can be used to program various BCM User Settings and Options to suit individual owner requirements.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program

Scroll through the Program list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required item, press the Enter key.

User Settings

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / User Settings

• The User Settings screen will be displayed showing the current settings for the vehicle.

• To modify any item, select the item using the Up and Down arrow keys, and press the Modify soft key or the Enter

key. The appropriate screen will then be displayed.

• When all user setting changes have been made, press the Program soft key to initiate the programming process.

• Press the Confirm soft key when notified the programming has been completed successfully.

Instrument Illumination

NOTE

The default instrument illumination setting is 35%.

• From the User Settings screen, select Instrument Illumination and press the Enter key.

• Use the Left and Right arrow keys to scroll across the number displayed on the Tech 2 screen and modify using the

numeral keys.

• When selected, press the Enter key to return to the User Settings screen.

• To return to the User Settings screen without changing the selection shown, press the Exit key.

Options

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / Options

• The Options screen will be displayed showing the current option selection for the vehicle.

• To modify any item, select the item using the Up and Down arrow keys and press the Modify soft key or the Enter

key. The appropriate screen will then be displayed.

• When all option changes have been made, press the Program soft key to initiate the programming process.

• Press the Confirm soft key when notified the programming has been completed successfully.

Body Control Module Page 12J–128

Page 12J–128

Antenna Height Memory

NOTE

The default Antenna Height Memory setting is

Enable.

• From the Options screen, select Antenna Height Memory and press the Enter key.

• Use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight the selection required.

• When selected, press the Enter key to return to the Options screen.

• To return to the Options screen without changing the selection shown, press the Exit key.

Set Key to Priority 1

This function allows the priority key in the ignition switch to be set as the Priority 1 key.

NOTE

Only the data relevant to the level of BCM

installed and vehicle configuration will be

displayed.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / Set Key to Priority 1

To return to the Program screen without changing the selection shown, press the Exit key.

Learn BCM Settings

The following process allows the Tech 2 to learn the vehicle BCM settings to enable a replacement BCM to be

programmed with the same settings.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / Learn BCM Settings

• Press the Okay soft key to initiate the process.

• When notified the process is completed, press the Confirm soft key to return to the Program screen.

• To return to the Program screen without learning the BCM settings, press the Exit key.

Program Learnt BCM Settings

The following process allows the Tech 2 to program the learnt BCM settings into a replacement BCM.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / Program Learnt BCM Settings

• Press the Okay soft key to initiate the process.

• To return to the Program screen without programming the BCM, press the Exit key.

• When notified the process is completed, press the Confirm soft key to return to the Program screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–129

Page 12J–129

4.9 Security

The Tech 2 can be used to view and program various vehicle security information.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Security

Scroll through the Security list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required item, press the Enter key.

BCM Link to ECM/PCM/PIM

NOTE

It is only possible to perform the BCM Link

procedure after TIS approval (Enable

Programming) and the (BCM) Security Code

have been obtained. The (BCM) security code

information is contained on the IMPORTANT

SECURITY INFORMATION card issued with the

vehicle when new. Refer to Section 0C Tech 2 for

further details to enable programming.

The following procedure should be carried out after replacement of a BCM, PCM or PIM to allow the replaced module to

be linked with the other modules.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Security / BCM Link to ECM/PCM/PIM

• Scroll through the list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required item, press the Enter key.

• To return to the Security screen without changing the selection shown, press the Exit key.

• Obtain TIS approval when this screen is displayed.

• When TIS approval has been obtained, return to this screen.

• Scroll through the list using the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the required item, press the Enter key.

• Enter the six-digit (BCM) security code, including any leading zeros, using the numeral keys on Tech 2.

• Press the Enter key to continue.

• Follow the instructions as shown on the Tech 2 screen.

• When notified the process is completed, press the Confirm soft key to return to the Security screen.

Security Information

NOTE

The (BCM) Security Code is required to access

the Security Information. The security code is

contained on the IMPORTANT SECURITY

INFORMATION card issued with the vehicle

when new.

The security information relevant to the current vehicle fit for the following items can be accessed using Tech 2:

• Radio PIN Number,

• TIS Hardware Key Number, and

• Mechanical Key Number.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Security / Security Information

• Enter the six-digit (BCM) security code, including any leading zeros, using the numeral keys on Tech 2.

• Press the Enter key to continue.

• Tech 2 screen displays the relevant security information.

• Press the Quit soft key to return to the Security screen.

Body Control Module Page 12J–130

Page 12J–130

Program

The Program function allows:

• The Radio Pin Number to be changed if the audio system head unit has been replaced,

• The Door Key number to be changed if door locks have been replaced, and

• The programming of a new key.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Security / Program

Scroll through the Program list using the Up and Down arrow keys, to select the required item, press the Enter key.

Body Control Module Page 12J–131

Page 12J–131

5 Diagnostics

5.1 Introduction

The body control module diagnostic procedures are organised in a logical structure that begins with the Diagnostic

System Check followed by the Symptoms Diagnostic Table. Refer to 5.6 Diagnostic System Check.

The diagnostic system check directs the diagnostic procedure to the appropriate diagnostic trouble code (DTC) that are

displayed on Tech 2 as well as directing fault finding to the symptoms diagnostic table where there are no DTC’s

displayed for the specific BCM function.

The symptoms diagnostic table will then direct the technician to detailed fault finding procedures to the specific faulty

BCM functional area.

These specific BCM functional area diagnostic tables will than enable the technician to fault find down to component or

circuit level to the item that is faulty.

In most causes these specific functional area Diagnostic Tables have both Preliminary and Main Diagnostic Tables that

will direct fault finding through a logical process of eliminating serviceable systems and components.

Body Control Module Page 12J–132

Page 12J–132

5.2 Prerequisites to Diagnosis and

Troubleshooting

Preliminary System Requirements

Before proceeding with system checks, ensure the following:

• No moisture is present in the wiring harness connections in the A-pillars.

• Sound ground connections are available for all functioning components, particularly at the body ground connection

(adjacent to the battery).

• The battery is in good condition and charged above 11.5 V.

Pre-delivery Mode

To provide additional battery protection, the vehicle is delivered with the BCM in pre-delivery mode. In this mode, the

battery saver period is set to 3 minutes. For further information, refer to 2.1 Body Control Module Operating Modes.

Pre-delivery mode is disabled once the vehicle has travelled for a total of 30 minutes at speeds above 20 km/h.

Pre-delivery mode can be enabled or disabled by using the trip computer buttons with the multi-function display (MFD) or

by using Tech 2.

Safety Requirements

When carrying out work that involves the risk of an electrical short circuit, disconnect the battery, refer to

Section 00 Warnings, Cautions and Notes.

To avoid the risk of being caught in the mechanism, do not touch mechanical components during function checks.

Equipment and Checking

When undertaking wiring checks or measurements on electrical systems, any digital multimeter that is used MUST have

a minimum impedance of 10 M Ω.

When undertaking wiring checks or measurements on electrical systems, any 12 V test lamp that is used MUST be of an

LED type that will not load up the circuit being checked or cause any damage to the BCM.

Exercise care when taking readings from wiring harness connectors. Backprobe connectors wherever possible to avoid

terminal damage and subsequent connection failure.

When carrying out wiring checks as directed by the diagnostic charts, use the adaptors contained in connector test

adaptor kit Tool No. KM609 rather than probe terminals and connectors using incorrect sized multimeter connections.

This prevents spreading the terminals and damaging the wiring harness.

NOTE

Some steps in the diagnostic charts test for an

abnormal or false signal. This method is used

when the normal or correct signal is of limited

diagnostic value.

NOTE

Ensure the ignition is turned off and the battery

ground lead is disconnected before any test

requiring disconnection or reconnection of any

BCM connector.

• When checking the system, follow the exact

order of the test steps.

• If the required nominal value is not achieved

in any stage, the problem must be rectified

before proceeding further.

• Check the correct multimeter range is

selected before the test is carried out, unless

the multimeter being used has an auto

ranging function.

Body Control Module Page 12J–133

Page 12J–133

• To lower the BCM so as to gain access

to wiring harness connectors, refer to

6 Service Operations.

• Testing various systems requires access to

specific wiring harness connectors. For the

location of these connectors, refer to

Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring

Harnesses.

Body Control Module Page 12J–134

Page 12J–134

5.3 Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions

The BCM constantly performs self-diagnostic tests on the vehicles body control system. When the BCM detects a fault

condition in the vehicles body control operating parameters, the BCM sets a DTC to represents that fault condition. In

addition, DTCs are classified as either Current or History DTC.

Current Diagnostic Trouble Codes

A DTC is a Current DTC if the fault condition that triggers that DTC is present during the last BCM self-diagnostics.

History Diagnostic Trouble Codes

A DTC is a History DTC if the fault condition that triggers that DTC is not present during the last BCM self-diagnostics.

Body Control Module Page 12J–135

Page 12J–135

5.4 Description of Diagnostic Trouble Codes

The diagnostic system check directs the diagnostic procedure to the appropriate diagnostic trouble code (DTC) tables if

there is a DTC currently stored in the BCM. The BCM has a total of 29 trouble codes that relate to problems within serial

data communications, theft deterrent, tail / stop lamp failure, door lock / unlock overload, power antenna circuit overload

and general power supply shorts and variations. Refer to 5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List.

The diagnostic tables locate a faulty circuit or component through a logic based on the process of elimination. These

diagnostic tables are developed with the following assumptions:

• the vehicle functioned correctly at the time of assembly,

• there are no multiple faults, and

• the problem currently exists.

Understanding and the correct use of the diagnostic tables are essential to reduce diagnostic time and to prevent

miss-diagnosis.

Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Code Fault Condition

Some fault conditions trigger multiple component DTCs even if the fault condition exists only on a single component. If

there are multiple DTCs stored in the BCM, the service technician must view and record all DTCs logged.

Relationships between the logged DTCs can then be analysed to determine the source of the fault condition. Always

begin the diagnostic process with the DTC Table of the fault condition that may trigger other DTCs to set.

The following fault conditions may trigger multiple DTCs:

• A fault in the serial data communication circuit.

• A system voltage that is too low may cause incorrect engine management system operation or engine management

component malfunction.

• A system voltage that is too high may damage the BCM and/or other vehicle body management components.

• Fault condition in the BCM Read Only Memory (ROM) or Random Access Memory (RAM).

• Fault condition in the BCM internal circuitry or programming.

• Improperly connected sensor or component wiring connector.

• An electrical fault condition in the following shared BCM electrical circuits trigger DTCs in components or sensors

that share in the faulty shared circuit. Test the electrical circuit of the appropriate sensors or components to isolate

the fault condition.

• 5 V Reference Circuit,

• Low Reference Circuit, or

• Ignition Control Voltage Circuit.

If there are no obvious faults to begin a multiple DTC fault condition diagnostic procedure, diagnose the DTCs in the

following order unless directed otherwise:

1 Always start with the lowest numbered Component Level DTCs such as:

• sensor DTCs,

• solenoid DTCs, or

• relay DTCs.

2 Then follow with system level DTCs such as:

• data communications DTCs,

• theft deterrent DTCs, or

• rear tail and stop lamp failure DTCs.

Body Control Module Page 12J–136

Page 12J–136

5.5 Intermittent Fault Conditions

Description

A fault condition is intermittent if one of the following conditions exists:

• the fault condition is not always present,

• the fault condition cannot be presently duplicated, or

• there is no Current DTC but a History DTC is stored.

Checks Actions

Preliminary • Gather information from the customer regarding the conditions that trigger the

intermittent fault such as:

• At what engine or ambient temperature range does the fault occur?

• Does the fault occur when operating aftermarket electrical equipment inside

the vehicle?

• Does the fault occur on rough roads or in wet road conditions?

• If the intermittent fault is a start and then stall condition, check the theft deterrent

system, refer to 5.13 Theft Deterrent System.

Tech 2 Tests The following are lists of Tech 2 diagnostic tests that may be used to diagnose

intermittent faults:

• Wriggle test the suspected wiring harness and connectors while observing the

Tech 2 operating parameters. If the Tech 2 read-out fluctuates during this

procedure, check the tested wiring harness circuit for a loose connection.

• Observe the Freeze Frame / Failure Records for the suspected history DTC and

then operate the vehicle in the conditions that triggers the intermittent fault while

an assistant observes the suspected Tech 2 operating parameter data.

• Capture and store data in the Snapshot mode when the fault occurs. The stored

data may be played back at a slower rate to aid in diagnostics. Refer to OC Tech 2

for more information on the Snapshot function.

• Compare the engine operating parameters of the engine being diagnosed to the

engine operating parameters of a known good engine.

Temperature Related Temperature related intermittent fault conditions occur only when the engine or ambient

temperature is hot, or only when it is cold.

• If the intermittent fault is heat related, review the Tech 2 data in relationship to the

following:

• high ambient temperature,

• engine generated heat,

• circuit generated heat due to a poor electrical connection or high electrical

load, and

• higher than normal load conditions (towing, etc.).

• If the intermittent fault is related to cold ambient or engine temperature, review the

Tech 2 data in relationship to the following:

• low ambient temperature, and

• the fault condition that occurs only on a cold start situation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–137

Page 12J–137

Checks Actions

Additional Tests • Incorrect installation of aftermarket electrical equipment such as the following:

• mobile phones,

• theft deterrent alarms,

• lights, or

• radio equipment.

• Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) caused by a faulty relay, ECM controlled

solenoid or switch. The fault is triggered when the relay or solenoid is activated.

• Test the A/C compressor clutch and some relays that contain a clamping diode or

resistor for an open circuit.

• Test the generator for a faulty rectifier bridge that may allow the A/C noise into the

ECM electrical circuit.

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the engine management system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–138

Page 12J–138

5.6 Diagnostic System Check

Description

The body control module diagnostic procedures are organised in a logical structure that begins with the diagnostic

system check followed by the symptoms diagnostic table.

The diagnostic system check directs the diagnostic procedure to the appropriate diagnostic trouble code (DTC) that are

displayed on Tech 2 as well as directing fault finding to the symptoms diagnostic table where there are no DTC’s

displayed for the specific BCM function.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 If you are unsure whether the problem isolated to the ECM or the issue is affecting a number of vehicle functions,

proceed to OD Vehicle Diagnostics

2 Within OD Vehicle Diagnostics there are a number of requirements that must be met before you can start

diagnosis.

3 Tests the operation of Tech 2.

4-6 Tests the integrity of the GM LAN or Class 2 serial data communication circuit. A PIM DTC sets if the PIM detects a

fault condition in the communication circuit. A fault condition on the serial data communication circuit may trigger

multiple DTCs on other sensors and components.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Is the fault specifically isolated to this system / module?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

OD Vehicle

Diagnostics

2 Have you read the basic Diagnostic Requirements, Diagnostic

Precautions and Preliminary Checks? Go to Step 3

Refer to

OD Vehicle

Diagnostics

3 1 Switch off the ignition.

2 Connect Techs 2 to the DLC.

3 Switch on the ignition with the engine not running.

4 Push the Tech 2 power button on.

Does the Tech 2 screen illuminate and display Tech 2? Go to Step 4 Refer to

0C Tech 2

4 Using Tech 2, attempt to communicate with the PIM and the BCM.

Did the PIM or the BCM failed to communicate?

Refer to 6E1

Powertrain Interface

Module – V6

6E3 Powertrain

Interface Module –

GEN III V8 Go to Step 5

5 Are DTC U1064, U2100, U2105, U2106, U2108, B1009, B1013,

B1014, B1000, B1019, B3057, B3924, P0633, P1611 or P1678 set in

the PIM?

Refer to 6E1

Powertrain Interface

Module – V6

6E3 Powertrain

Interface Module –

GEN III V8 Go to Step 6

6 Are there any other BCM DTC’s listed? Refer 5.8

Diagnostic Trouble

Code List.

Refer to 5.7

Symptoms

Diagnostics Table.

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the engine management system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–139

Page 12J–139

5.7 Symptoms Diagnostics Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic Systems Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Is the fault intermittent? Refer to

5.5 Intermittent

Fault Conditions Go to Step 3

3 Is the problem with the Serial Data Communications? Refer to

5.9 Serial Data

Communications Go to Step 4

4 Does the theft deterrent system fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.13 Theft

Deterrent System Go to Step 5

5 Does the rear lamp failure system fail to operate correctly? Refer to 5.23 Rear

Lamp Failure

Warning System Go to Step 6

6 Does the accessory power and wipers fail to operate when the ignition

switch is in the accessory position? Refer to

5.11 Accessory

Power Control Go to Step 7

7 Does the central door locking fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.12 Central Door

Locking Go to Step 8

8 Does the entry deterrent system fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.14 Entry

Deterrent System Go to Step 9

9 Do the power windows fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.15 Power Window

System Go to Step 10

Do the wiper / washer system fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.16 Wiper

Systems Intermittent

Function Go to Step 11

11 Does the dome lamp control fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.17 Dome Lamp

Delay Control Go to Step 12

12 Does the automatic lamp control fail to operate correctly? Refer to

5.18 Automatic

Lamp Control Go to Step 13

Does the interior dome lamp continue to stay on and the central

locking continually unlock? Refer to

5.20 OPS

Deployment Vehicle

Shutdown Go to Step 14

14 Does the priority key system fail to operate? Refer to

5.21 Priority Key

System Go to Step 15

15 Does the power antenna fail to operate? Refer to

5.22 Power

Antenna Control Go to Step 16

16 Does the hazard lamp control fail to operate? Refer to

5.24 Hazard

Lamp Control —

Body Control Module Page 12J–140

Page 12J–140

5.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List

NOTE

Where Tech 2 displays PCM this should be read

as ECM for V6 engine vehicles.

DTC Code Description Refer

1 Output Overload.

The DTC sets when a short to battery voltage is

detected on the following outputs: Indicators, Front

Intermittent Wiper, Aircon / Priority 2, Demist /

Priority 1, Main Horn and Accessory Relay

When DTC 1 is set, refer to the section relevant to the

function listed.

NOTE

DTC 1 can also be set by electrical transients.

Therefore, if DTC 1 is set and there are no

noticeable problems with the vehicle, clear

DTC and check function of BCM outputs. If

DTC does not reset and BCM outputs are

functioning correctly, disregard DTC 1.

2 Slip Ring Communication Error.

Each time the BCM receives a message with an

invalid checksum via the slip ring a counter is

incremented. Twenty consecutive bad messages

must be received to set the DTC.

Refer to 5.13 Theft Deterrent System

5 Tail Lamp Bulb Failure.

The BCM monitors the current in the tail lamp

circuit. The DTC sets and illuminates a telltale in

the instrument cluster if the tail lamp current is

below the factory preset value for more than

3 seconds.

Refer to 5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System

6 Stop Lamp Bulb Failure.

The BCM monitors the current in the stop lamp

circuit. The DTC sets and illuminates a telltale in

the instrument cluster if the stop lamp current is

below the factory preset value for more than

3 seconds.

Refer to 5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System

7 No Serial Data From ECM / PCM

The DTC sets if ECM/PCM serial data lost for

10 seconds.

Refer to.5.9 Serial Data Communications.

17 Not Okay To Start Received From ECM/PCM.

The DTC sets when the BCM is in passive arm

mode and attempting to start without a valid slip

ring message.

Refer to 5.13 Theft Deterrent System

18 Auxiliary (Secondary and Tertiary) Serial Data

Bus Fault.

The data bus isolator will remain closed for 625 ms

after entering the short loop poll sequence. If no

ECM/PCM communication is received, the isolator

will be opened. If the BCM receives ECM/PCM

communication after the isolator has been opened,

the DTC is set.

Refer to 5.9 Serial Data Communications.

19 EEPROM Error.

The EEPROM data is divided into eight tables, and

each table has a checksum. When each table is

loaded into RAM, the checksum is verified. If the

checksum is wrong the DTC is set.

Clear the DTC. If the DTC sets again, replace the BCM,

refer to 6 Service Operations

Body Control Module Page 12J–141

Page 12J–141

DTC Code Description Refer

20 RAM Error.

The BCM maintains a RAM copy of the EEPROM

data. Each of the eight tables is checked

periodically to verify the checksum. If the

checksum is wrong the DTC is set.

Clear the DTC. If the DTC sets again, replace the BCM,

refer to 6 Service Operations

21 Battery Voltage Too Low.

The DTC sets if the battery voltage drops below

8 V for 20 seconds.

Refer to:

• 6D1-1 Charging System – V6

• 6D3-1 Charging System – GEN III V8

22 Battery Voltage Too High.

The DTC sets if the battery voltage is above 16 V

for 20 seconds.

Refer to:

• 6D1-1, Charging System – V6

• 6D3-1 Charging System – GEN III V8

23 Door Lock / Unlock Circui t Overload.

The DTC sets when the doors have been activated

10 times in rapid succession. Once activated the

doors will timeout for a period of 32 seconds.

Refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking

24 Remote Key Rolling Code Error.

Each time an RF message is received the Rolling

Code is checked. The DTC sets if the Rolling

Code is out of range.

To resynchronise the rolling code, turn the ignition on with

the remote key.

Refer to 5.10 Remote Receiver / Key

25 Engine Start Without Slip Ring

Communications.

During key reading the BCM checks the engine

speed from the ECM / PCM. When the engine

speed is above 500 rpm, the BCM will start a

counter to track the number of times the key has

been powered up without a valid message being

received. When the counter exceeds 20 the DTC

is set. This corresponds to 5 seconds of invalid key

communications after the engine has been started.

Refer to 5.13 Theft Deterrent System

26 No Serial Data From ABS/ETC.

The DTC is set if ABS serial data lost for

10 seconds.

Refer to 5.9 Serial Data Communications.

27 No Serial Data From Instrument.

The DTC is set if instrument serial data lost for

10 seconds.

Refer to 5.9 Serial Data Communications.

28 Antenna Drive Circuit Overload.

The DTC sets on detection of a short to ground on

the antenna drive output.

Refer to 5.22 Power Antenna Control

29 Stop Lamp or Park Lamp Fuse Failure.

The DTC sets when the stop lamp or park lamp

fuse voltage is below battery voltage.

Refer to 5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System

Body Control Module Page 12J–142

Page 12J–142

5.9 Serial Data Communications

DTC Description

This diagnostic procedure covers the following DTCs:

• DTC 7 No serial Data from PCM / ECM

• DTC 18 Auxiliary (Secondary and Tertiary) Serial Data Bus Fault

• DTC 26 No Serial Data from ABS/ETC

• DTC 27 No Serial data from Instrument

Circuit Description

The vehicle system control modules and the Tech 2 diagnostic scan tool communicate with each other via the serial data

bus. In V6 engine all modules on the body side of the vehicle use UART communication protocol up to the PIM whilst the

powertrain side uses GM LAN communication protocol.

In GEN III V8 engine all modules on the body side of the vehicle use UART communication protocol up to the PIM whist

the powertrain side uses Class 2 communication protocol.

As there are two different protocols utilised and messages from both the body and powertrain side need to be transferred

from one another, the PIM is used to interface between UART and GM LAN and Class 2 communication protocols.

Tech 2 is able to communicate both UART, Class 2 and GM LAN control modules.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if Tech 2 is operating correctly.

3 Checks if there is power, ground and serial communications to the BCM.

4-5 Checks if there is battery voltage supplied to the BCM.

6 Checks if the BCM ground circuits are serviceable.

7 Checks if any other components on the serial data bus are affecting the serial communications of the bus.

8 Checks the circuits of the serial data bus. Isolates whether it is the circuits or the BCM that is at fault.

9 Checks if all modules on the serial data bus are communicating correctly.

10 Isolates if the problem is on the body or powertrain side of the bus.

11 Checks which modules on the body side of the serial data bus are communicating.

12 Isolates whether the fault in the body side of the serial data bus affects all components or an isolated component is

at fault.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Body Control Module Page 12J–143

Page 12J–143

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 Turn the ignition on.

4 Push power button on Tech 2.

Does Tech 2 power up (screen illuminates and displays Tech 2)? Go to Step 3 Refer to 0C Tech 2

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module.

Does Tech 2 display BCM system identification information (BCM

level and type)? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 4

4 Using a test lamp, backprobe between connector A15 – X1 pin 10

circuit 740 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to 5

5 Check the integrity of fuse F29.

Is fuse F29 serviceable?

Repair or replace

circuit 740

(refer to Note 2)

Replace the fuse

F29 (refer to

Note 1)

If the replaced fuse

blows, check for a

short to ground in

circuit 740

6 1 Disconnect connectors A15 – X1 and X3.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between the following and a known good ground.

• A15 – X1 pin 11

• A15 – X1 pin 20

• A15 – X3 pin 1

Does the multimeter display continuity in all instances? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

the affected circuit.

(refer to Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–144

Page 12J–144

Step Action Yes No

7 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Disconnect the powertrain interface module PIM connector A5 –

X1.

3 Using Tech 2, check for serial data communication between the

BCM and Tech 2 (refer to Step 2)

4 If serial data communications is restored between the BCM and

Tech 2, refer to 6E1 Powertrain Interface Module V6 or 6E3

Powertrain Interface Module – GEN III V8 for further diagnosis.

5 If serial data communications is not restored between the BCM

and Tech 2, turn the ignition off and reconnect the PIM.

6 Repeat this procedure for each of the following:

• Instrument cluster (connector P3 – X1)

• Radio assembly (connector A133 – X1)

• Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module

(connector A65 – X1)

• All other relevant modules (dependant on vehicle / model

type) that are connected to the Serial data

communications bus. Refer to V6 Serial Data Block

Diagram. or GEN III V8 Serial Data Block Diagram.

If during the disconnection of any of the module, serial data

communications is restored, refer to that modules relevant

section.

Was serial data communications between the BCM and Tech 2

restored when any of the modules were disconnected from the serial

data bus?

Refer to the

relevant section for

further diagnosis

and repair

procedures

Install all

connectors

Go to Step 8

8 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Disconnect the battery.

3 Disconnect all relevant modules (refer to Step 6) and the BCM.

4 Check the circuits 800, 1061 and 774 for short to ground, open

circuit or short to voltage.

Are the circuits serviceable? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuits 800, 1061

or 774 as

necessary (refer to

Note 2)

Connect the battery

and reconnect the

BCM.

Go to Step 9

9 1 With Tech 2 still connected and the ignition on,

2 On Tech 2 select:

Vehicle / Module / ECU Presence Check.

Does Tech 2 communicate with all control modules fitted to the body

side of the vehicle? (If Not Present is displays next to a control

module, then there is no communication between Tech 2 and that

control module.) System Serviceable Go to Step 10

10 In Step 8 does Tech 2 display that communications is Not present to

any of the following:

• Engine control module,

• Transmission control module,

• ABS / TCS module(where fitted), and

• PCM (GEN III V8) or ECM (V6)

Refer to

6E1 Powertrain

Interface Module –

V6 or

6E3 Powertrain

Interface Module –

Gen III V8 Go to Step 11

Body Control Module Page 12J–145

Page 12J–145

Step Action Yes No

11 In Step 8 does Tech 2 display that there is data Present to the:

• PIM,

• instrument cluster,

• radio,

• Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, and

• All other relevant modules (dependant on vehicle model type)

that are connected to the Serial data communications bus? System Serviceable Go to Step 12

12 Test the modules that Tech 2 displays as showing Not Present

where that module it is known to be fitted to vehicle.

Are any of these modules faulty? Repair or replace

the affected

module, refer to the

relevant system

section

Refer to

6E1 Powertrain

Interface Module –

6E3 Powertrain

Interface Module –

GEN III V8

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–146

Page 12J–146

5.10 Remote Receiver / Key

Circuit Description

When operating the remote coded key, an RF signal is transmitted to the remote receiver. This receiver transfers the

received data from receiver B55 – X1 pin 2 to A15 – X2 pin 1 via circuit 218. The receiver ground connection is from

receiver B55 – X1 pin 7 to A15 – X1 pin 14 via circuit 219. The BCM responds to the received signal based on the

frequency of the RF signal (the button on the key that is pressed). There are three buttons on the remote coded key:

UNLOCK, LOCK and Rear Compartment Release.

Remote Coded Key Battery Failure

The remote coded key is powered by its own internal battery. If this battery fails, no RF signal is transmitted when

operating the LOCK, UNLOCK and Rear Compartment release buttons. However, if the battery loses power, the remote

coded key reader has the ability to power the key once it is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to on or to Start.

This enables theft deterrent disarming.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the remote coded key operates the vehicles central locking.

3 Checks if the remote coded key disarms the theft deterrent system.

4-8 Checks if the remote receiver is receiving an RF coded signal and is sending this data to the BCM.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Close and lock the doors.

2 Insert the remote coded key into the driver’s door lock.

3 Use the key to unlock and lock the door.

Do all the doors unlock and lock? Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.12 Central Door

Locking

3 1 Unlock the driver’s door with the key.

2 With the theft deterrent LED flashing, insert the key into the

ignition switch and turn the ignition on.

Does the theft deterrent LED turn off? Go to Step 3

Refer to

5.13 Theft

Deterrent System

4 1 Lock the driver’s door with the key.

2 Remove the key from the driver’s door lock.

3 Operate the key UNLOCK button within 2 metres of the driver’s

door B-pillar.

Does the driver’s door only (two-stage unlock) or all doors (single-

stage unlock) unlock? Go to Step 4

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–147

Page 12J–147

Step Action Yes No

5 When performing Step 3, did all of the following occur when the key

Unlock button was pressed:

• turn signal lamps flashed twice?

• dome lamp illuminated (with the dome lamp switch in Door

position), and

• theft deterrent LED turned off? Go to Step 5

Refer to

5.13 Theft

Deterrent System

6 1 Close all the doors.

2 Operate the LOCK button on the key within 2 metres of the

driver’s door B-pillar.

Do all doors lock? Go to Step 6

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

7 When performing Step 5, did all of the following occur when the key

Lock button was pressed:

• theft deterrent LED began flashing

• turn signal lamps flashed once, and

• dome lamp turned off if illuminated (ensure switch is in Door

position)? Go to Step 7

Refer to

5.13 Theft

Deterrent System

8 Stand within 2 metres of the rear of the vehicle and press the key

Rear Compartment Release button for 2 seconds.

Does the rear compartment lid unlock? System Serviceable

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary tests have been performed.

2-3 Checks if the remote coded key has a valid code and is communicating with the remote receiver.

4-6 Checks if circuits are serviceable to B55 Remote Receiver assembly.

7 Confirms if the remote receiver is receiving an RF coded signal and sending data to the BCM.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations

Body Control Module Page 12J–148

Page 12J–148

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Central Door

Locking

Scroll down and select Remote Key Status.

3 Operate the UNLOCK, LOCK and Rear Compartment Release

buttons on the key.

Does Tech 2 display Valid key status?

Correct signal.

Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 3

3 1 Using another vehicle with a fully functional key and receiver,

connect the suspect BCM and its keys and Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Select Remote Key Status as per Step 2.

3 Operate the UNLOCK, LOCK and Rear Compartment Release

buttons on the key.

Does Tech 2 display Valid key status?

Correct signal

Go to Step 4

Programme a new

key to the original

vehicle. Refer to

6.2 Remote Coded

Key

4 1 Return to the original vehicle which has the suspected faulty

remote coded key / receiver and replace the BCM and its

original keys.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the remote key receiver

connector B55 – X1 pin 6 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

circuit 740 (refer to

Note 2)

5 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 219 between

BCM connector A15 – X1 pin 14 and remote key receiver connector

B55 – X1 pin 7.

Is circuit serviceable? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 219 (refer to

Note 2)

6 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 218 between

BCM connector A15 – X2 pin 1 and remote key receiver connector

B55 – X1 pin 2.

Is circuit serviceable? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 218 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Replace the remote key receiver with a known functional remote

receiver, refer to 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console.

2 On Tech 2 select

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Central Door

Locking

Scroll down and select Remote Key Function.

3 Operate the UNLOCK, LOCK and Rear Compartment Lid

release button on the remote coded key.

Does Tech 2 display Unlock request, Lock request, Boot release

request? System Serviceable Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–149

Page 12J–149

5.11 Accessory Power Control

Circuit Description

When the ignition is switched to the ON, the ACC position, or if the radio is switched on, the BCM energises the

accessory control relay supplying power to the radio and the wiper system. The BCM disables the relay (disconnecting

the power) when the ignition is switched off or when the driver’s door is opened (depending on the accessory shutdown

option selected).

Turning the radio on when the ignition is off triggers the BCM to energise the accessory control relay for a 60 minute

period. However, if the radio is switched off within this period, the relay will be disabled immediately.

If the front wiper is active when disabling of the accessory power is initiated, the BCM monitors the wiper park input

before disabling the accessory control relay, which allows the wipers to park. If the wiper park input is not detected within

3 minutes, the BCM will automatically disable the relay.

When the key is switched to ACC or ON, a 12 V supply from the ignition switch is detected by the BCM at either

A15 – X3 pin 4, (Accessories output via circuit 4) or A15 – X3 pin 2 (On output via circuit 300).

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if accessory power is present when the ignition is turned to ACC position.

3 Checks if the wiper’s operate when the ignition is turned to ACC position.

4 Checks if accessory power turns off when the drivers door is opened.

5 Checks if the vehicles radio operates when the radio is turned on.

6 Checks if the radio turns off when the drivers door is opened.

7 Checks if the accessory socket fuse F17 is serviceable.

8 Checks if the wiper fuse F18 is serviceable.

9-11 Checks if the accessory control relay R20 is serviceable.

12-15 Checks that all the circuits associated with the accessory control relay are serviceable.

16-17 Checks if the circuits between the BCM and the radio is serviceable.

18 Checks the driver’s door ajar switch is serviceable.

19 Checks if the radio’s main power and accessory power fuses are serviceable.

20-21 Checks if the circuits associated with the radio’s accessory power are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Body Control Module Page 12J–150

Page 12J–150

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Turn the ignition to the ACC position.

2 Using a test lamp, probe between the accessory socket and a

known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 7

3 Turn the wipers on.

Do the wipers operate? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 8

4 1 Using a test lamp, probe between the accessory socket and a

known ground

2 With the drivers door closed turn the ignition on then off.

NOTE

The test lamp will be illuminated.

3 With the driver’s door shutdown user-option selected, open the

driver’s door.

Does the test lamp turns off when the drivers door opens? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 18

5 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the radio on.

Does the radio operate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 19

6 1 With the radio on and the drivers door closed, turn the ignition

on then off.

2 With the driver’s door shutdown user-option selected, open the

driver’s door.

Does the radio turn off? — Go to Step 16

7 Check the accessory socket fuse F17.

Is the fuse serviceable?

Go to Step 9

Replace F17 (refer

Note 1) If fuse

blows again check

for shorts to ground

in circuits 70 and/or

143

8 Check the wiper system fuse F18 fuse.

Is the fuse serviceable? Repair or replace

circuit 70 or 243

(refer to Note 2)

Replace F18 (refer

Note 1). If fuse

blows again check

for shorts to ground

in circuits 70 and/or

243

9 1 Replace the accessory control relay R20 with a known good

relay.

2 Turn the ignition to the ACC position.

3 Using a test lamp, probe between the accessory socket and a

known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? —

Replace relay R20

with original one.

Go to Step 10

10 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

A15 – X3 pin 4 and a known ground.

2 Turn the ignition to the ACC position.

Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 14

Body Control Module Page 12J–151

Page 12J–151

Step Action Yes No

11 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 9 and

a known ground.

3 Using a test lamp, probe between the accessory socket and a

known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? (R20 relay audibly switches.) Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 12

12 Check for an open circuit in circuit 755 connecting BCM connector

A15 – X1 pin 9 to the accessory control relay R20 terminal X34-86.

Is the circuit serviceable? Go to Step 13

Repair or replace

circuit 755 (refer to

Note 2)

13 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the accessory socket connector X112 – X1 pin A and R20 – X34-87

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Repair or replace

circuit 342 or 1640

(refer to Note 2)

Repair or replace

circuit 70 or 143

(refer to Note 2)

14 Check for an open circuit or short to ground in circuit 4 connecting

BCM connector A15 – X3 pin 4 to the ignition switch S149 – X1 pin 4.

Is the circuit serviceable? Go to Step 15

Repair or replace

circuit 4 (refer to

Note 2)

15 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between the

ignition switch S149 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display battery voltage?

Repair or replace

the ignition switch

assembly. Refer to

9 Steering

Repair or replace

circuit 1640 (refer

to Note 2)

16 1 Using a test lamp, probe between A15 – X3 pin 10 and a known

ground.

2 Turn on the radio.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 17

17 1 Disconnect the audio head unit connector X133 – X1.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

X133 – X1 pin 5 and A15 – X3 pin 10.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Refer to

12D Entertainment

System

Repair or replace

circuit 314 (refer to

Note 2)

18 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between A15 – X4 pin 19 and a

known ground.

2 Open the driver’s door.

Does the test lamp extinguish with the drivers door open? Set correct user

options.

Repair or replace

door ajar circuit.

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

19 Check the radio’s main power fuse F23 and the radio’s accessory

power fuse F16.

Are both fuses serviceable?

Refer to

12D Entertainment

Systems.

Replace blown fuse

F23 or F16 (refer

Note 1) If fuse

blows again check

for shorts to ground

in circuits 43 and

1040.

Go to Step 20

20 1 With the ignition off, turn off the radio and close the driver’s

door.

2 Using a test lamp, probe the front of fuse body F16.

3 Turn on the radio.

Does the test lamp illuminate only when the radio is on? — Go to Step 21

21 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 43 connecting

fuse F16 to radio connector A133 – X1 pin A4.

Is the circuit serviceable? —

Repair or replace

circuit 43 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–152

Page 12J–152

5.12 Central Door Locking

System Overview

The central door-locking system enables simultaneous locking or unlocking of all doors, enhanced locking or deadlocking

of the doors as well as single-stage and two-stage unlocking.

With single-stage unlocking, all doors unlock when the remote coded key UNLOCK button is pressed.

With two-stage unlocking:

• The driver’s door unlocks when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is pressed momentarily, and

• The passengers’ doors unlock when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is pressed momentarily for a

second time.

• The driver’s and passengers’ doors unlock together when the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key is pressed

continuously for more than 0.5 seconds.

NOTE:

When investigating a complaint of a central door

system locking problem or malfunction, always

start at the Central Door Locking Functional

Check Diagnostic Table

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Unlocking the Doors Using the Driver’s Door Microswitch

The remote coded key unlocks the vehicle’s doors via the driver’s door lock microswitch when it is rotated in the lock.

This action closes the S63 switch assembly, which places the ground connection of S63 – X1 pin 1 on to S63 – X1 pin 2.

Circuit 781 and A15 – X4 pin 16 is grounded through S63 – X1 which is seen by the BCM as an unlock request.

Locking the Doors Using the Driver’s Door Microswitch

The remote coded key locks the vehicle’s doors via the driver’s door lock microswitch when it is rotated in the lock. This

action closes the S63 switch assembly, which places the ground connection of S63 – X1 pin 1 on to S63 – X1 pin 3.

Circuit 780 and A15 – X4 pin 17 is grounded through S63 – X1 which is seen by the BCM as an lock request.

Door Locking System Test Overview

Refer to Preliminary Diagnostic Table for diagnostic procedure.

The vehicle’s two door locks are connected directly to the BCM via the various hard-wired circuits.

The door lock actuators are shown in a typical situation where the lock plunger is shown in the lowered (or locked) state.

Each microswitch located within each door actuator is also shown in the locked position.

The diagnostic tests will prove:

• If the fuses are serviceable

• If the driver’s door key lock is operating correctly

• If the input (Lock Request) ports of the BCM are functioning correctly

• If the output (Door Lock Drive) ports of the BCM are functioning correctly

• If the wiring between the BCM and the door lock actuators is functioning correctly

• If the microswitches within the door lock actuators are functioning correctly

• If the door actuator motors are functioning correctly.

Body Control Module Page 12J–153

Page 12J–153

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Conditions for Setting the DTC

The following Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) relevant to this test can be set within the BCM:

DTC 23 Door Lock / Unlock Circuit Overload.

This DTC sets when the doors have been activated ten times in rapid succession. Once activated, the doors will timeout

for a period of 32 seconds.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

The following condition for clearing the DTC must be met for it to clear.

Wait until the 32 seconds have elapsed before clearing the DTC.

NOTE

If any DTCs are set, reference should be made to

the relevant diagnostic charts in this Section.

Tech 2 will display Clear DTCs and Alarm Codes

Failed if any DTC or Alarm Codes are still current.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 By using the remote coded key and the driver’s (external) key to unlock and lock the doors to determine if the

locking system is functioning normally.

3 Tests if all doors will lock / unlock when activated by the driver’s door snib.

4 Tests if all doors will lock / unlock when activated by the passenger’s door snib.

5 Tests if all doors will lock / unlock when activated by the remote coded key.

6-7 Tests if the deadlock feature operates with both the key in the door lock mechanism and the remote coded key.

8-9 Tests the rear compartment release switch and remote coded key to open the rear compartment.

10 With the engine running, to test if Door Auto locking occurs to all doors after the vehicle’s transmission is engaged.

This feature (when enabled through the instrument panel) affects automatic vehicles only.

11 Tests if the door ajar monitoring system functions correctly.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

closed to enable the locks to operate.

Body Control Module Page 12J–154

Page 12J–154

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Wind all windows fully down.

2 Close all doors.

3 Lock all doors.

4 Unlock and then lock the driver’s door by rotating the key in the

door lock.

Did all doors unlock and then lock together? Go to Step 3

Refer to Unlocking

the Driver’s Door

Using the Door

Lock Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

3 1 Unlock the doors.

2 Lock and then unlock the driver’s door by operating the door

snib button.

Did all doors lock and then unlock together? Go to Step 4

Refer to Unlocking

the Driver’s Door

Using the Door

Snib Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

4 Lock and then unlock the passenger’s door by operating the door snib

button.

Did all doors lock and then unlock together?

Go to Step 5

Refer to Unlocking /

Locking the Front

Passenger’s Doors

Using the Door

Snib Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

5 1 Lock both doors.

2 Operate the remote coded key UNLOCK and LOCK buttons

within 4 metres of driver’s side B-pillar to both unlock and lock

the doors.

Does the driver’s door unlock first (2 stage unlocking) or all doors

unlock together (single-stage unlocking)? Go to Step 6

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

6 1 Unlock all doors using the key in the driver’s door lock.

2 Using two consecutive locking motions with the key, deadlock

all doors.

Did all doors deadlock together? Go to Step 7

Refer to

Deadlocking the

Vehicle’s Doors

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

7 1 Unlock both doors using the key in the driver’s door lock.

2 Using two consecutive locking motions with the remote coded

key’s LOCK button, deadlock all doors.

Did all doors deadlock together? Go to Step 8

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

8 1 Shut the rear compartment lid (where applicable).

2 Operate the rear compartment release button located within the

glove box compartment.

Does the rear compartment lid release and partially raise itself from

its shut position? Go to Step 9

Refer to Rear

Compartment

Release Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

9 1 Shut the rear compartment lid (where applicable).

2 Operate the rear compartment release button located on the

remote coded key.

Does the rear compartment lid release and partially raise itself from

its shut position? Go to Step 10

Refer to Rear

Compartment

Release Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–155

Page 12J–155

Step Action Yes No

10 1 Unlock all doors.

NOTE

This test only affects vehicles fitted with automatic

transmission. If you are working on a manual vehicle, go

to step 11.

2 From the driver’s Customisation Menu, check that Auto Lock In

Drive is enabled (in vehicles fitted with automatic transmission).

3 Place the gearshift in the park position.

4 Turn the ignition to the ON position and start the engine.

5 Move the gearshift lever into the drive and park positions.

Do all doors automatically lock and then unlock? Go to Step 11

Refer to Auto Door

Locking (Gearshift

In and Out of Park

Position) Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

11 1 Close all doors.

2 Check the dome light switch is in the DOOR position.

3 Alternatively open and close both the driver’s and all passenger

doors, noting each door’s effect on the dome lamp.

Do both door ajar switches operate the dome lamp as expected? System Serviceable

Refer to Door Ajar

Switches

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Unlocking the Driver’s Door Using the Door Lock Diagnostic Table

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

shut to enable the locks to operate.

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 By using the remote coded key and the driver’s (external) key to unlock the door to determine if the unlocking

system is functioning normally.

3 Checks if the fuses that supply power to the central locking system are serviceable.

4 Checks using Tech 2 if the drivers door unlocks.

5-8 Checks if the circuits that affect the driver door lock mechanism are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–156

Page 12J–156

Step Action Yes No

2 Unlock the driver’s door using the key in the door lock.

Did the driver’s door unlock normally?

Go to Step 3

Check all

mechanical aspects

of the lock for

jamming, refer 1A5

Front and Rear

Door Assemblies

3 Check that fuses F104, F105 and F20 are not blown.

Are any fuses blown?

Replace blown

fuse. If fuses blow

again check

affected circuits for

short to ground.

(refer Note 1) Go to Step 4

4 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

3 Lock all doors.

4 Operate the driver’s door lock using the key to unlock doors.

Does Tech 2 displays Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between the

following:

• S63 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

• S63 – X1 pin 2 and A15 – X4 pin 16.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary. (refer

Note 2)

6 Using a fused test lead, probe between A15 – X4 pin 16 and a known

ground.

Does Tech 2 displays Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 7 Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

7 Using the Tech 2 press the Unlock soft key, to simulate a driver door

unlock request to the BCM.

Does the driver’s door Unlock and does Tech 2 display Unlocking

then Unlocked within 1 second?

NOTE

Tech 2 will display DDUnlocking then DDUnlocked if

2 stage unlocking has been programmed on. The 2nd

press of the Unlock button will display Unlocking then

Unlocked on Tech 2 Replace driver’s

door lock actuator

(refer to Note 4) Go to Step 8

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the following:

• Y13R – X1 pin 2 (drivers door) and A15 – X4 pin 8.

• Y13R – X1 pin 1 (drivers door) and A15 – X4 pin 9.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? —

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary. (refer

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–157

Page 12J–157

Unlocking the Driver’s Door Using the Door Snib Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the driver’s door snib unlocks the door to determine if the unlocking system is functioning normally.

3 Checks if the fuses that supply power to the central locking system are serviceable.

4 Checks using Tech 2 if the drivers door unlocks with the door snib.

5-9 Checks if the circuits that affect the driver door snib mechanism are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

shut to enable the locks to operate.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Lock the driver’s door.

2 Unlock the driver’s door using the door snib.

Did the driver’s door unlock normally?

Go to Step 3

Check all

mechanical aspects

of the lock and snib

mechanism for

jamming, refer 1A5

Front and Rear

Door Assemblies

3 Check that fuses F104, F105 and F20 are not blown.

Are any fuses blown?

Replace blown

fuse. If fuses blow

again check

affected circuits for

short to ground.

(refer Note 1) Go to Step 4

4 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

3 Lock all doors.

4 Operate the driver’s snib to unlock the door.

Does Tech 2 displays Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the following:

• Y13R – X1 pin 5 (drivers door) and a known ground.

• Y13R – X1 pin 3 (drivers door) and A15 – X4 pin 16.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? —

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary. (refer

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–158

Page 12J–158

Step Action Yes No

6 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X4 pin 16 and a

known ground.

Does Tech 2 displays Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 7

Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

7 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

2 Lock the door using the driver’s door snib.

Does Tech 2 displays Locking then Locked within 1 second? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the following:

• S63 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

• S63 – X1 pin 2 and A15 – X4 pin 16.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? —

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary.

(refer Note 2)

9 1 Using a test lamp backprobe between the BCM connector A15

– X4 pin 8 and a known ground.

2 Using the Tech 2 press the Unlock soft key, to simulate a driver

door unlock request to the BCM.

Does the test lamp illuminate for less than 1 second?

Replace the door

lock actuator

(Y13R). (refer to

Note 4)

Repair or replace

circuit 694 (refer

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Unlocking / Locking the Front Passenger’s Doors Using the Door Snib Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the passenger’s door snib unlocks the door to determine if the unlocking system is functioning normally.

3 Checks if the fuses that supply power to the central locking system are serviceable.

4 Checks using Tech 2 if the passenger’s door unlocks with the door snib.

5-6 Checks if the circuits that affect the passenger door snib mechanism are serviceable.

7 Checks using Tech 2 if the passenger’s door locks.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

shut to enable the locks to operate.

Body Control Module Page 12J–159

Page 12J–159

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

Preliminary

Diagnostic Table

in this Section

2 Unlock the front passenger’s door using the door snib.

Did the passenger’s door unlock normally?

Go to Step 3

Check all

mechanical

aspects of the lock

and snib

mechanism for

jamming. Refer

1A5 Front and

Rear Door

Assemblies

3 Check that fuses F104, F105 and F20 are not blown.

Are any fuses blown?

Replace blown

fuse. If fuses blow

again check

affected circuits for

short to ground.

(refer Note 1) Go to Step 4

4 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

3 Lock all doors.

4 Operate the passenger door snib to unlock passenger doors.

Does Tech 2 display Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the following:

• Y13L – X1 pin 5 (front passenger door) and a known ground.

• Y13L – X1 pin 3 (front passenger door) and A15 – X4 pin 5.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? —

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary (refer

Note 2)

6 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X4 pin 5 and a

known ground.

Does Tech 2 display Unlocking then Unlocked within 1 second? Go to Step 7

Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

7 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

2 Using the Tech 2 press the Lock soft key, to simulate a

passenger door Lock request to the BCM.

Does Tech 2 display Locking then Locked within 1 second?

Replace the door

lock actuator

(Y13L) (refer to

Note 4)

Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–160

Page 12J–160

Deadlocking the Vehicle’s Doors Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if all the doors lock and unlock together when the driver’s door lock is operated with the key.

3 Checks using Tech 2 if all doors deadlock when the key is rotated twice in the lock mechanism.

4 Checks if the circuits that affect the driver’s door deadlock mechanism are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

This test assumes that all door locks are

functioning normally.

The test requires the doors to be closed. It is also

helpful to have the windows down.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 Unlock and lock the driver’s door using the key in the door lock.

Did the driver’s and passenger’s doors together and the unlock and

lock normally? Go to Step 3

Return to

Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

3 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests

Scroll down and select Central Locking.

3 Insert the key into the driver’s door lock and turn the key to the

lock position twice sequentially.

Does Tech 2 display Deadlocking then Deadlocked within 1

second? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the following:

• S63 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

• S63 – X1 pin 3 and A15 – X4 pin 17.

Does the multimeter display continuity in both instances? Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

Repair or replace

the affected circuit

as necessary (refer

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–161

Page 12J–161

Auto Door Locking (Gearshift In and Out of Park Position) Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if all the door actuators function normally.

3 Checks if the Autolock feature has been programmed on.

4 Checks if the Autolock feature operates when the automatic transmission is moved out of the Park position.

5 Checks using Tech 2 if the automatic transmission is sending valid gearshift positions.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

shut to enable the locks to operate.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 Do both the driver and passenger door actuators lock normally?

Go to Step 3

Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

3 Has the AUTOLOCK feature been enabled on the instrument cluster’s

Customisation Menu? Go to Step 4 Refer to 12C

Instrumentation

4 1 Place the gearshift lever in the P (park) position.

2 Ensure that both doors are closed and unlocked.

3 Check the handbrake has been applied firmly, and

4 Turn the ignition switch on.

5 Move the gearshift from the P position to the D (drive) position

and back to the P position.

Has the AUTOLOCK feature locked and unlocked both doors? — Go to Step 5

5 1 Switch the ignition off.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Serial Data

Inputs

Scroll down and select PRNDL Switch.

3 Turn the ignition on.

4 Move the gearshift lever through all other gearshift (PRNDL)

positions.

Does Tech 2 display the correct gearshift lever positions? Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

Refer to 6E1

Powertrain

Interface Module –

6E4 Powertrain

Interface Module –

GEN III V8

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–162

Page 12J–162

Door Ajar Switches Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the dome lamp is serviceable.

3-4 Checks if the dome lamp illuminates when the driver’s and passenger’s doors are opened.

5 Checks using Tech 2 if the driver’s door ajar switch is serviceable.

6 Checks if the circuits associated with the driver’s door switch are serviceable.

7 Checks using Tech 2 if the passenger’s door ajar switches are serviceable.

8 Checks if the circuits associated with the passenger door switches are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

To test the door ajar switch operation of both

doors, the operation of the dome lamp is

observed. To do this, check that it is switched to

the DOOR position.

To avoid long delays occurring while waiting for

the interior lamp timeout delay to expire, have the

ignition switch turned to the ON position

throughout the duration of the test.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 Check the dome light works by switching it to the ON position.

Does the dome lamp illuminate normally? Go to Step 3

Replace globe,

refer to

12B Lighting

System

3 1 Check the dome light switch is in the DOOR position for the

remainder of the test.

2 Close both doors.

3 Open and close the driver’s door.

When the driver’s door is opened, does the dome lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5

4 Open each passenger door in turn.

When each passenger door is opened, does the dome lamp

illuminate? — Go to Step 7

Body Control Module Page 12J–163

Page 12J–163

Step Action Yes No

5 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Alarm – Theft

Deterrent

Scroll down and select Driver’s Door.

2 Open and close the driver’s door.

Does Tech 2 display Open and Closed? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6

6 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between BCM connector A15 –

X4 pin 19 and a known ground.

2 Open the driver’s door.

Does the test lamp extinguish when the driver’s door is opened and

illuminate when the drivers door is closed? Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

Repair or replace

the circuit 746 or

S156 door switch

as necessary. (refer

Note 2)

7 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Alarm – Theft

Deterrent

Scroll down and select Passenger’s Door.

2 Open and close the each passenger door.

Does Tech 2 display Open and Closed for each door? — Go to Step 8

8 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between BCM connector A15 –

X4 pin 4 and a known ground.

2 Open each passenger door one at a time.

Does the test lamp extinguish when each of the passenger doors are

opened and illuminate when all the passenger doors are closed? Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

Repair or replace

the circuits 745 or

S156 door switches

as necessary. (refer

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Rear Compartment Release Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the rear compartment lid is shutting correctly.

3-4 Checks using Tech 2 if the rear compartment lid opens.

5 Checks using Tech 2 if an open request is received when the rear compartment release button is pressed.

6-7 Checks the circuit associated with the rear compartment release switch.

8-10 Checks the circuit associated with the rear compartment solenoid.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for repairs to door actuators and switches.

5 Refer to Section 1A4 Hood, Rear Compartment Lid for repairs to door actuators and switches.

NOTE

When testing the door locks, all doors must be

shut to enable the locks to operate.

Body Control Module Page 12J–164

Page 12J–164

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 Check the rear compartment lid is shut.

Is the lid firmly secured by the latch?

Go to Step 3

Check for any

mechanical

damage to the lid or

lock assemblies.

(refer note 5)

3 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Rear

Compartment.

2 Operate the rear compartment solenoid Open soft key on

Tech 2 to open the rear compartment lid.

Does the rear compartment lid open? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4

4 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between BCM connector A15 –

X4 pin 2 and a known ground.

2 Operate the rear compartment solenoid Open soft key on

Tech 2 to open the rear compartment lid.

Does the test lamp illuminate for less than 1 second?

NOTE

The battery voltage applied to the solenoid only lasts for

0.75 second. Go to Step 5 Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

5 1 With Tech 2 select

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Central Door

Locking / Rear Compartmen t

2 Close the rear compartment.

3 Operate the rear compartment release button (S195).

Does Tech 2 display Rear Compartment Solenoid display On

momentarily once button is pressed? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 6

6 1 Switch the ignition to the OFF position.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between S195 – X1 pin B and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 251 (refer

Note 2)

7 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between S195 – X1 pin A and a known ground.

2 Press the switch and note the multimeter reading.

Does the multimeter display continuity while the switch is pressed? Go to Step 8 Replace switch

S195 (refer Note 5)

8 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between BCM connector A15 –

X4 pin 2 and a known ground.

2 Press the rear compartment release button to open the rear

compartment lid.

Does the test lamp illuminate for less than 1 second?

NOTE

The battery voltage applied to the solenoid only lasts for

0.75 second. Go to Step 9 Replace the BCM

(refer Note 3)

Body Control Module Page 12J–165

Page 12J–165

Step Action Yes No

9 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe solenoid Y29 – X1 pin A and a

known ground.

2 Press rear compartment release button to open the rear

compartment lid.

Does the test lamp illuminate for less than 1 second each time the

switch is activated but the rear compartment lid fails to open? Go to Step 10

Repair or replace

circuit 56 (refer

Note 2)

10 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

Y29 – X1 pin B and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Replace Solenoid

Y29 (refer Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–166

Page 12J–166

5.13 Theft Deterrent System

Circuit Description

The theft deterrent system can be armed by pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key or passively armed

automatically by the BCM (30 seconds after the ignition is switched off).

When the system is armed, the ECM (V6 engines) or PCM (GEN III V8 engine) prevents the engine from starting. The

theft deterrent system can be disarmed by:

• Pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key (this unlocks the doors, turns on the interior lamp and

disarms the system for 30 seconds), or

• Inserting the remote coded key into the ignition switch cylinder and turning on the ignition. This allows the BCM to

read the security code serial data output from the remote coded key contact pin via the slip ring.

If the system does not disarm when the ignition switch is turned on (security warning LED off), press the LOCK or

UNLOCK button on the remote coded key to disarm the theft deterrent system. This may be caused by a misaligned or

faulty slip reader or a faulty key.

The remote coded key is powered by it’s own internal battery. If the battery fails however, the slip ring can power the key

when the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder and the ignition turned on or turned to start.

When arming the system by pressing the LOCK button on the remote coded key, the central locking will lock all doors

and cause the turn signal lamps to flash once and simultaneously arm the theft deterrent system which will be indicated

by the security status indicator (LED) flashing continually in the instrument cluster.

When disarming the system by pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key, the central locking will unlock all

doors and cause the turn signal lamps to flash twice and simultaneously disarm and the theft deterrent system which will

be indicated by the security status indicator (LED) turning off in the instrument cluster.

V6 Engines

The BCM, ECM and the PIM are all integral components of the vehicle theft deterrent system. The theft deterrent system

authenticates the security code programmed into each of these modules to prevent unauthorised vehicle operation. This

authentication process includes the following steps:

• At predetermined conditions, the BCM sends a security code to the PIM.

• When the ignition is switched on, the PIM receives and compares this security code from the BCM against the

security code programmed into the PIM.

• Once the PIM receives the correct security code from the BCM, it sends a reply security code to the ECM.

• The ECM receives and compares this security code from the PIM against the security code programmed into the

ECM.

• The authentication process is complete once the ECM receives the correct security code from the PIM within the

specified time frame.

• The ECM allows normal vehicle operation and engine cranking to occur.

GEN III V8 Engine

On vehicles with a GEN III V8 engine, the BCM polls the PIM and sends an encrypted BCM / key security code when the

ignition is turned on. The security code is received via the slip ring, or via the remote receiver in the event of no slip ring

communication. The PIM compares the received security code with its stored security code and if the codes match,

enables continued engine cranking and sends a separate encrypted security code to the PCM. The PCM compares this

code with its stored security code and if the codes match, enables injector fuelling to continue. The PIM returns an “Ok to

Start” message to the BCM.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Body Control Module Page 12J–167

Page 12J–167

Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if is serial data communication is present at the BCM.

3-5 Checks the operation of the remote coded key.

6-10 Checks the operation of the security status LED on the instrument panel.

11 Checks if the theft deterrent system passive arms after 30 seconds

12 Checks if the slip ring enable signal is present when the remote coded key turns the ignition on.

13 Checks if the ignition switch is operating correctly.

14-16 Checks the slip ring contact and voltages are correct.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Close all the doors but do not lock.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module

and follow the Tech 2 prompts.

Does Tech 2 display the BCM’s system identification which includes

Identifier, Part Number and Software Version? Go to Step 3

Refer to

5.9 Serial Data

Communications

3 NOTE

In this Step, monitor the turn signal lamps on the

instrument cluster.

1 Remove the remote coded key from the ignition switch.

2 Press the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

Do all doors lock? Go to Step 4

Refer to

5.12 Central Door

Locking

4 Press the UNLOCK then the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

Do the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash on lock and unlock operation? Go to Step 5

Refer to

5.24 Hazard

Lamp Control

5 Does the security status indicator flash? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 6

Body Control Module Page 12J–168

Page 12J–168

Step Action Yes

6 1 Wait 30 seconds.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Alarm – Theft

Deterrent.

Scroll down and select Security Status.

NOTE

Ensure all doors are closed

3 Press the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

Does Tech 2 display Armed? Go to Step 7 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

7 1 Insert the remote coded key into the ignition cylinder and turn to

the ON position.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Miscellaneous Tests / Security System / Security LED.

3 On Tech 2 press the On soft key.

Does the security status indicator illuminate for 5 seconds? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 8

8 Using a fuse test lead, backprobe between connector A15 – X1 pin 21

and a known ground.

Does the security status indicator illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 9

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

connector A15 – X1 pin 21 and P3 – X1 pin 9.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the

instrument cluster.

Refer to 12C

Instrumentation

Repair or replace

circuit 264 (refer to

Note 2)

10 With the key removed from the ignition switch, press the UNLOCK

button on the remote coded key

Did the security status indicator extinguish? Go to Step 11 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

11 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Alarm – Theft

Deterrent

Scroll down and select Security Status.

2 Remove the key from the ignition.

3 Open then close the drivers door.

Does Security Status change to Passive Armed after 30 seconds? Go to Step 12 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

12 1 Open and close the driver’s door and wait 30 seconds.

2 Tech 2 displays the following:

• Security Status is Passive Armed

• Slip Ring Enable is No.

3 Insert the remote coded key into the ignition switch and turn to

the ON position.

Does Tech 2 display the following:

• Security Status changes to Disarmed, and

• Slip Ring Enable momentarily changes from No to Yes and then

back to No? System Serviceable Go to Step 13

Body Control Module Page 12J–169

Page 12J–169

Step Action Yes

13 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Alarm – Theft

Deterrent.

Scroll down and select Ignition Switch.

2 Turn the ignition on and off.

3 Tech 2’s Ignition Switch parameters should display On and Off

with the corresponding ignition switch positions.

Does Tech 2 display as described? Go to Step 14

There is a problem

with the ignition

switch, refer to

9 Steering

14 1 Isolate the remote coded key contact pin using a thick piece of

paper.

2 Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch

to the ON position.

3 Using a test lamp, backprobe between S149 – X2 pin A and a

known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16

15 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage probe between the slip

ring and ground

Does the multimeter display fluctuate between 0 to 10 V AC? Go to Step 16 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

16 1 Turn the ignition off and remove the key.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance backprobe

between BCM connector A15 – X2 pin 7 and S149 – X2 pin A.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 1073 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–170

Page 12J–170

5.14 Entry Deterrent System

Circuit Description

This system provides an audible and visual warning of unauthorised entry to the vehicle. The entry deterrent system arms

when:

• the lock button on the remote coded key is pressed

• all doors lock successfully, and

• 10 seconds has elapsed.

The entry deterrent software is Tech 2 programmable and requires a patch harness to enable sensing of rear

compartment lid and hood switches and fitment of anti-theft horns.

NOTE

The entry deterrent system does not arm

passively.

Refer 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2-3 Checks the central locking system is operating correctly.

4 Checks the theft deterrent system is operating correctly

5 Checks the vehicles turn signal lamps are operating correctly.

6 Checks the dome lamp system is operating correctly.

7-10 Checks if the theft deterrent system is triggered when the driver’s door is opened.

11 Checks if the theft deterrent system is triggered when the passenger’s doors are opened.

12 Checks if the theft deterrent system is triggered when the rear compartment is opened.

13 Checks if the theft deterrent system is triggered when the hood is opened.

14 Checks if the theft deterrent system is triggered when the ignition is turned on.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Is the central door locking system fully functional?

Go to Step 3

Refer to

5.12 Central Door

Locking

3 Are all door ajar switches and associated circuits functioning

correctly, refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking? Go to Step 4

Repair or replace

as required (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–171

Page 12J–171

Step Action Yes No

4 Is the theft deterrent system fully functional, refer to 5.13 Theft

Deterrent System? Go to Step 5

Repair or replace

as required (refer to

Note 2)

5 Do all turn signal lamps operate correctly? Go to Step 6 Refer to 12B

Lighting Systems

6 Turn the dome lamp switch to the ON position.

Does the dome lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7

Refer to 5.17

Dome Lamp Delay

Control

7 NOTE

The alarm may sound in this Step.

1 Fully open the windows.

2 Close the doors.

3 Arm the system by pressing the remote coded key LOCK

button.

4 Lift the driver’s door snib button and open the driver’s door.

Is the alarm triggered? Go to Step 8

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

8 In Step 6, did both the theft deterrent and standard vehicle horns

(alarm) sound? Go to Step 9

Refer to Horn

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

9 In Step 6, did both the turn signal lamps and the dome lamp flash

once every second? Go to Step 10

Refer to 5.24

Hazard Lamp

Control

10 1 Disarm the system by pressing the remote coded key UNLOCK

button.

2 Turn on the ignition.

Do the turn signal lamps flash three times and does the MFD display

the alarm trigger point? Go to Step 11 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

11 NOTE

The alarm may sound in this Step.

1 Turn the ignition from off to on to off (to cancel the Alarm trigger

point display).

2 Arm the system.

3 Test the front passenger door input by opening the door to

trigger an alarm.

4 Disarm the system by operating the UNLOCK button on the

remote coded key.

5 Turn on the ignition.

6 Observe the MFD display for alarm trigger point.

7 Cancel the alarm trigger point display.

8 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 for the rear passenger doors.

Does each passenger door trigger the alarm? Go to Step 12

Refer to Horn

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–172

Page 12J–172

Step Action Yes No

12 NOTE

The alarm may sound in this Step.

1 Cancel the alarm trigger point display.

2 Arm the system.

3 Open the rear compartment using the key in the rear

compartment lock. (where applicable)

Does opening the rear compartment trigger the alarm? Go to Step 13

Refer to Horn

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

13 NOTE

The alarm may sound in this Step.

1 Cancel the alarm trigger point display.

2 Arm the system.

3 Open the hood.

Is the alarm triggered? Go to Step 14

Refer to Horn

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

14 1 Cancel the alarm trigger point display.

2 With the driver’s window open and the doors closed, arm the

system.

3 Place a thick piece of paper over the remote coded key slip ring

contact.

4 From outside of the vehicle, insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn on the ignition.

Is the alarm triggered? System Serviceable

Refer to Horn

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks with Tech 2 the status of the driver’s door.

3 Checks with Tech 2 the status of each of the passenger doors.

4 Checks with Tech 2 the status of the rear compartment lid.

5-6 Checks the circuits that operate the rear compartment lid.

7 Checks with Tech 2 the status of the bonnet / hood.

8-9 Checks the circuits that operate the bonnet / hood.

10 Checks with Tech 2 the status of the ignition switch.

11 Checks the circuits that operate the ignition switch.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Body Control Module Page 12J–173

Page 12J–173

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Cancel any alarm trigger point displayed on the MFD.

2 Disarm the system by pressing the remote coded key Unlock

button.

3 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

4 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs

Scroll down and select Driver’s Door.

5 Open and close the driver’s door.

Does the Tech 2 display the correct driver’s door status? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

3 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs

Scroll down and select Passenger Doors.

2 Open and close each passenger door in turn.

Does Tech 2 display the door status (open then close)? Go to Step 4

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

4 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs

Scroll down and select Rear Compartment Status.

2 Open then close the rear compartment lid.

Does Tech 2 display the rear compartment status (open then close)? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 5

5 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

connector A15 – X4 pin 6 and a known ground.

2 Open the rear compartment lid.

Does the multimeter indicate less than 0.5 V? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 6

6 1 Open the rear compartment lid.

2 Disconnect the rear compartment switch S189 – X2 connector.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the rear compartment switch S189 – X2 pin A and a known

ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Repair or replace

circuit 744 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace rear

compartment lamp

switch

7 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs

Scroll down and select Bonnet.

2 Open then close the hood.

Does Tech 2 display the bonnet status (Open then Closed)? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 8

Body Control Module Page 12J–174

Page 12J–174

Step Action Yes No

8 1 Open the hood.

2 Disconnect the hood switch S135 – X1 and S135 – X2.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the hood switch S135 – X1 pin A and a known ground.

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

the hood switch S135 – X2 pin A and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity? (both circuits)

Install the hood

switch connectors

Go to Step 9 Replace the hood

switch

9 With the hood switch (S135) connectors still disconnected, check for

a short to ground or open circuit in circuits 109 and 263.

Are the circuits serviceable? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 109 and/or

263 as required

(refer to Note 2)

10 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs / Ignition Switch.

2 Turn the ignition on.

Does Tech 2 display the ignition switch On status? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 11

11 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe BCM connector A15 – X3 pin 2.

2 Turn the ignition on.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 300 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Horn Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks with Tech 2 if the theft deterrent horn sounds.

3 Checks with Tech 2 if the vehicle’s warning horns sounds.

4-6 Checks the theft deterrent horn wiring and operation when triggered by the BCM.

7-8 Checks the vehicle warning horns wiring and operation when triggered by the BCM.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Body Control Module Page 12J–175

Page 12J–175

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 NOTE

The horn will sound in this Step.

1 Disarm the system.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests /

Security System / Theft Deterrent Horn

3 On Tech 2 press the theft deterrent horn On soft key.

Does the theft deterrent horn sound? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 On Tech 2

Miscellaneous Tests / Horn

2 On Tech 2 press the horn On soft key.

Does the vehicle horns sound? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 7

4 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

connector A15 – X3 pin 15 and a known ground.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Security System / Theft Deterrent Horn

3 On Tech 2 press the theft deterrent horn On soft key.

Does the multimeter indicate the following voltages?

• On = Battery voltage

• Off = 0 volts Go to Step 5 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

5 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

the theft deterrent horn connector B9 – X1 pin A and a known

ground.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Security System / Theft Deterrent Horn

3 On Tech 2 press the theft deterrent horn On soft key.

Does the multimeter indicate the following voltages?

• On = Battery voltage

• Off = 0 volts Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 1149 (refer

to Note 2)

6 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between the

theft deterrent horn B9 base and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the theft

deterrent horn

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

Repair or replace

ground connection

(refer to Note 2)

7 Press the horn pad on the steering wheel.

Does the vehicle’s warning horns sound? Go to Step 8

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

8 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 17 and a

known ground.

Does the vehicle’s warning horns sound? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 28 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–176

Page 12J–176

5.15 Power Window System

Circuit Description

The BCM controls the power supply to each window motor. It also controls the automatic down function of the driver and

front passenger door windows. This function is activated when the respective power window down button is pressed for

more than 0.4 second.

Once activated, the automatic down feature is cancelled by activating the driver / front-passenger window up switch and

then releasing it. The window remains stationary until the up or down button is pressed again.

Power is supplied to the window system continuously when the ignition is on. When the ignition is switched off and no

door has been opened, power is supplied to the window system for a maximum of one hour. If any door is opened, power

is supplied to the system for a maximum of 45 seconds after the door is opened.

When the doors are unlocked using the remote coded key, power is supplied to the system for 45 seconds. The delay is

cancelled when the doors are locked by the remote coded key.

Introduction

The preliminary test is used to aid in localising the cause to malfunction in the power window system and confirms the

serviceability of the power window control switch and rear door switches (where applicable).

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if there is any visual physical damage to either windows or door assemblies.

3 Checks if the door ajar switches are operating correctly.

4 Checks if the indicator lamps illuminate on the centre switch panel.

5 Checks if the drivers side window travels down when the down switch is pressed.

6 Checks if the drivers side window travels up when the up switch is pressed.

7 Checks if the passenger side window travels down when the down switch is pressed.

8 Checks if the passenger side window travels up when the up switch is pressed.

9 Checks if the drivers side window auto down function operates correctly.

10 Checks if the indicator lamps go out when the doors are locked with the remote coded key.

11 Checks if the indicator lamps illuminate when the doors are unlocked with the remote coded key.

12 Checks if the power windows power supply is interrupted 45 seconds after the drivers door is opened.

13 Checks if the rear windows operate when the lockout switch is in the On (pressed) position.

14 Checks if the right-hand rear window travels down and up when the door switch is pressed with the lockout switch

off.

15 Checks if the left-hand rear window travels down and up when the door switch is pressed with the lockout switch off.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for further details and disassembly procedures.

5 Refer to Section 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for further details and disassembly procedures.

6 Refer to 6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar Wiring Loom Connectors for further details and disassembly

procedures.

Body Control Module Page 12J–177

Page 12J–177

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Are all power windows free from mechanical faults such as a

damaged window regulator or badly worn guide rubbers or other

obvious visual damage to the door assembly? Go to Step 2

Repair / replace the

damaged assembly

(refer to Note 4)

3 Are all door ajar switches and associated circuits functioning

correctly, refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking? Go to Step 3

Repair or replace

as required (refer to

Note 2)

4 Turn the ignition on.

Do the green indicator lamps illuminate in the centre console power

window switch? Go to Step 4

Refer to Main

Power Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

5 With the ignition on, press and hold the front drivers window down

button.

Does the front drivers window travel down? Go to Step 5

Refer to Front

Window Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

6 With the ignition on, press and hold the front drivers window up

button.

Does the front drivers window travel up? Go to Step 6

Refer to Front

Window Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

7 With the ignition on, press and hold the front passengers window

down button.

Does the front passengers window travel down? Go to Step 7

Refer to Front

Window Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

8 With the ignition on, press and hold the front passengers window up

button.

Does the front passengers window travel up? Go to Step 8

Refer to Front

Window Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

9 1 With the ignition on, operate the driver’s window down button for

1 second.

2 As the window is travelling down automatically, operate the

drivers window up button momentarily.

Does the window stop? Go to Step 9

Refer to Front

Window Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

10 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 With the doors closed, use the button on the remote coded key

to lock the doors.

Is the window system power supply interrupted?

(Do the green indicator lamps extinguish in the front and rear window

switches?) Go to Step 10

Refer to Main

Power Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

11 Use the button on the remote coded key to unlock the doors.

Is the window system power supply restored and do the green

indicator lamps in the window switches turn on? Go to Step 11

Refer to Main

Power Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

12 1 With the doors closed, turn the ignition on then off.

2 Open the driver’s door.

Do the green indicator lamps extinguish in the centre console power

window switch after 45 seconds? Go to Step 12

Refer to Main

Power Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–178

Page 12J–178

Step Action Yes No

13 1 With the ignition turned on, press the lockout switch button on

the centre console switch to disable the rear window switches.

(Applicable only to vehicles with rear power windows)

2 Operate either rear door windows switches and confirm the

windows do not operate.

Do the rear windows not operate?

System serviceable

(vehicles with front

power windows)

Go to Step 13

(vehicle with rear

power windows)

Refer to Rear

Windows

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

14 1 With the ignition turned on, press the lockout switch button on

the centre console switch to enable the rear window switches.

2 Operate the right-hand rear door window switch and confirm the

right-hand rear window travels down then up.

Does the right-hand rear window travel down then up? Go to Step 14

Refer to Rear

Windows

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

15 Operate the left-hand rear door window switch and confirm the left-

hand rear window travels down then up.

Does the left-hand rear window travel down then up? System Serviceable

Refer to Rear

Windows

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Power Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2-4 Checks if the fuses and circuit breaker that supply power to the switch are serviceable.

5-7 Checks if the power window relay and associated circuits are serviceable.

8-10 Checks if the power window centre switch power and ground circuits are serviceable.

11 Checks if the circuits from the centre console switch to the door motors and rear door switches are serviceable.

12 Checks if power windows power supply time out function, operates after 45 seconds.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for further details and disassembly procedures.

5 Refer to Section 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for further details and disassembly procedures.

6 Refer to 6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar Wiring Loom Connectors for further details and disassembly

procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 With the ignition on, are the green indicator lamps illuminated in the

centre console power window switch? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 3

Body Control Module Page 12J–179

Page 12J–179

Step Action Yes No

3 Check that fuse F20 is not blown or circuit breaker F1 is not open

circuit.

Is the fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped?

Replace the blown

fuse and / or reset

the circuit breaker

(refer to Note 1)

Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5

4 Does F1 circuit breaker trip again (once reset), or the fuse F20 blow

again? Check for possible

shorts to ground in

the affected circuit —

5 Replace the power window relay R22 with a known good relay.

With the ignition on, are the green indicator lamps illuminated in the

centre console power window switch? Go to Step 12

Replace relay R22

with original

Go to Step 6

6 1 Disconnect connector A15 – X1.

2 Turn the ignition on.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between

harness connector A15 – X1 pin 8 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 1351 (refer

to Note 2)

7 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between

harness connector A15 – X1 pin 8 and BCM connector A15 –

X1 pin 8.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Power

Windows / Power Window Relay

3 On Tech 2 press the Enable soft key.

Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 8 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

8 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the centre console

power window switch assembly S222 – X1 pin 10 and a known

ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

9 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between the centre console power window switch assembly

S222 – X1 pin 9 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the centre

console switch

(S222) (refer to

Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2)

10 1 Disconnect connector A15 – X4.

2 Turn the ignition on.

3 Using a test lamp, probe between BCM connector A15 – X4 pin

11 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 11

Repair or replace

circuit 340 and/or

638 (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–180

Page 12J–180

Step Action Yes No

11 1 With A15 – X4 still disconnected also disconnect S222 – X1.

2 With a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between the

following S222 connector harness pins and a known ground:

• S222 – X1 pin 12

• S222 – X1 pin 13

• S222 – X1 pin 6

• S222 – X1 pin 5

• S222 – X1 pin 3

• S222 – X1 pin 2

• S222 – X1 pin 1

• S222 – X1 pin 8

• S222 – X1 pin 7

Does the multimeter display continuity on any of the above circuits? Repair or replace

the affected circuits Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

12 1 With the doors closed, turn the ignition on then off.

2 Open the driver’s door.

Is the window system power supply interrupted after 45 seconds and

do the indicator lamps extinguish in the centre console power window

switch? — Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Front Window Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks if the drivers side window travels up and down when the centre console switches are pressed.

3 Checks using Tech 2 if the drivers side window travels up and down.

4-8 Checks if the circuits for the driver’s window between the centre console switch and the BCM are serviceable.

9-10 Checks if the circuits for the driver’s window between the door pillar connector and the door motor are serviceable.

11 Checks if the passengers side window travels up and down when the centre console switches are pressed.

12 Checks using Tech 2 if the passengers side window travels up and down.

13-17 Checks if the circuits for the passenger’s window between the centre console switch and the BCM are

serviceable.

18-19 Checks if the circuits for the passenger’s window between the door pillar connector and the door motor are

serviceable.

20 Checks if the window auto down function operates correctly.

Body Control Module Page 12J–181

Page 12J–181

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for further details and disassembly procedures.

5 Refer to Section 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for further details and disassembly procedures.

6 Refer to 6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar Wiring Loom Connectors for further details and disassembly

procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 With the ignition on, press and hold the front drivers window

down button.

2 Press the front drivers window up button.

Does the front drivers window travel down then back to the up

position? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 3

3 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Power

Windows / Driver Window Auto Down.

3 Tech 2 displays Right Front Window Auto Inactive.

4 Select the Down soft key on Tech 2.

Does the front driver window travel down and stop when the Stop soft

key on Tech 2 is pressed?

Replace the centre

console power

window switch

(refer to Note 5)

Go to Step 11 Go to Step 4

4 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Disconnect connector A15 – X4 from the BCM.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

A15 – X4 pin12 and A15 – X4 pin 13.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Install connector

A15 – X4

Go to Step 5 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

5 1 Disconnect connector S222 – X1.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 8 and A15 – X4 pin 12

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 167 (refer to

Note 2)

6 1 Remove the driver’s door wiring harness connector X600

through the A pillar door rubber grommet (refer to Note 6).

2 Disconnect connector X600.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between the

body harness connector X600 pin 14 and X600 pin 15.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Operate the centre console driver’s door power switch up and

down.

Does the multimeter display a swing between positive and negative

battery voltage? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 7

Body Control Module Page 12J–182

Page 12J–182

Step Action Yes No

7 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 7 and X600 pin 15.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 666 (refer to

Note 2)

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector A15 – X4 pin 13 and X600 pin 14.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the centre

console power

window switch

(S222) (refer to

Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 667 (refer to

Note 2)

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

X600 pin 14 and X600 pin 15 of the driver’s door wiring harness

connector (door side, female housing)

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Reconnect

connector X600

and repeat Step 2 Go to Step 10

10 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the driver’s door power window motor M10R – X1 pin A and M10R –

X1 pin B.

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Repair or replace

circuit 667 and/or

666 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the driver’s

door power window

motor (M10R)

(refer to Note 4)

11 1 With the ignition on, press and hold the front passenger window

down button.

2 Press the front drivers window up button.

Does the front passengers window travel down then back to the up

position? Go to Step 20 Go to Step 12

12 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Power

Window s / Front Passengers Window Auto Down.

3 Tech 2 displays Left Front Window Auto Inactive.

4 Select the Down soft key on Tech 2.

Does the front passenger window travel down and stop when the

Stop soft key on Tech 2 is pressed?

Replace the centre

console power

window switch

(S222) (refer to

Note 5)

Go to Step 20 Go to Step 13

13 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Disconnect connector A15 – X4 from the BCM.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

A15 – X4 pin 25 and A15 – X4 pin 26.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Install connector

A15 – X4

Go to Step 14 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

14 1 Disconnect connector S222 – X1.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 13 and A15 – X4 pin 26

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 15

Repair or replace

circuit 1136 (refer

to Note 2)

15 1 Remove the passenger’s door wiring harness connector X500

through the A pillar door rubber grommet (refer to Note 6).

2 Disconnect connector X500.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between the

body harness connector X500 pin 14 and X500 pin 15.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Operate the centre console passenger’s door power switch up

and down.

Does the multimeter display a swing between positive and negative

battery voltage? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 16

Body Control Module Page 12J–183

Page 12J–183

Step Action Yes No

16 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 12 and X500 pin 15.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 17

Repair or replace

circuit 164 (refer to

Note 2)

17 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector A15 – X4 pin 25 and X500 pin 14.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the centre

console power

window switch

(refer to Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 165 (refer to

Note 2)

18 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

X500 pin 14 and X500 pin 15 of the passenger’s door wiring harness

connector (door side, female housing)

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Reconnect

connector X500

and repeat Step 11 Go to Step 19

19 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the passenger’s door power window motor M10L – X1 pin A and

M10L – X1 pin B.

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Repair or replace

circuit 165 and/or

164 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the

passenger’s door

power window

motor (M10L) (refer

to Note 4)

20 1 With the ignition on, operate the drivers window down button for

1 second.

2 As the window is travelling down automatically, operate the up

button momentarily.

Does the window stop? — Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Rear Windows Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

11 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks if the lockout switch on the centre console switch is serviceable.

3-4 Checks the circuits associated with the lockout switch are serviceable.

5-6 Checks if the right-hand rear power window switches operate the window up and down.

7-9 Checks if the circuits between the centre console switch and the right-hand rear window door switch are

serviceable.

10-13 Checks if the circuits between the right-hand rear window door switch and the door motor are serviceable.

14-15 Checks if the left-hand rear power window switches operate the window up and down.

16-18 Checks if the circuits between the centre console switch and the left-hand rear window door switch are

serviceable.

19-22 Checks if the circuits between the left-hand rear window door switch and the door motor are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A5 Front and Rear Door Assemblies for further details and disassembly procedures.

5 Refer to Section 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for further details and disassembly procedures.

6 Refer to 6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar Wiring Loom Connectors for further details and disassembly

procedures

Body Control Module Page 12J–184

Page 12J–184

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 Press the lockout switch button on the centre console switch to

enable the rear window switches.

Are the green indicator lamps illuminated on the right-hand rear and

the left-hand rear door power window switches? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3

3 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the centre console

power window switch assembly connector S222 – X1 pin 3 and

a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4

Replace the centre

console switch

(refer to Note 5)

4 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the right-hand rear and the

left-hand rear power window door switch connector S221 – X1 pin 2

alternatively and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate on both switches?

Replace the power

window switch

(refer to Note 4)

Repair or replace

circuit 1307 (refer

to Note 2)

5 With the ignition on, press and hold the right-hand rear window switch

down button.

Does the right-hand rear window travel down? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7

6 With the ignition on, press and hold the right-hand rear window switch

up button.

Does the right-hand rear window travel up? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 7

7 1 Remove the right-hand rear door wiring harness connector

X800 through the B pillar door rubber grommet (refer to Note 6).

2 Disconnect connector X800.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between the

body harness connector X800 pin 14 and X800 pin 15.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Operate the right-hand rear window centre console switch up

and down.

Does the multimeter display a swing between positive and negative

battery voltage? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 8

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 1 and X800 pin 15.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 170 (refer to

Note 2)

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 2 and X800 pin 14.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the centre

console switch

(S222) (refer to

Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 171 (refer to

Note 2)

10 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between X800 pin 14 and X800 pin 15 of the right-hand rear

door wiring harness connector (door side, female housing)

2 Operate the right-hand rear door window switch up and down.

Does the multimeter display approx 52 Ω (switch lamp resistance) in

the up position and open circuit in the down position?

Replace the right-

hand rear door

power window

motor (M14R)

(refer to Note 4) Go to Step 11

Body Control Module Page 12J–185

Page 12J–185

Step Action Yes No

11 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the right-hand rear door power window switch S221 – X1 pin 3 and

M14R – X1 pin 2.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 12

Repair or replace

circuit 671 (refer to

Note 2)

12 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the right-hand rear door power window switch S221 – X1 pin 6 and

M14R – X1 pin 1.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 13

Repair or replace

circuit 670 (refer to

Note 2)

13 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the right-hand rear door power window motor M14R – X1 pin A and

M14R – X1 pin B.

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Replace right-hand

rear power window

switch (refer to

Note 4)

Replace the right-

hand rear door

power window

motor (M14R)

(refer to Note 4)

14 With the ignition on, press and hold the left-hand rear door window

switch down button.

Does the left-hand rear window travel down? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16

15 With the ignition on, press and hold the left-hand rear door window

switch up button.

Does the left-hand rear window travel up? — Go to Step 16

16 1 Remove the left-hand rear door wiring harness connector X700

through the B pillar door rubber grommet (refer to Note 6).

2 Disconnect connector X700.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between the

body harness connector X700 pin 14 and X700 pin 15.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Operate the left-hand rear centre console switch down up and

down.

Does the multimeter display a swing between positive and negative

battery voltage? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 17

17 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 5 and X700 pin 15.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 18

Repair or replace

circuit 168 (refer to

Note 2)

18 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between

harness connector S222 – X1 pin 6 and X700 pin 14.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the centre

console switch

(S222) (refer to

Note 5)

Repair or replace

circuit 169 (refer to

Note 2)

19 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between X700 pin 14 and X700 pin 15 of the passenger’s door

wiring harness connector (door side, female housing)

2 Operate the left-hand rear door window switch up and down.

Does the multimeter display approx 52 Ω (switch lamp resistance) in

the up position and open circuit in the down position.

Replace the left-

hand rear door

power window

motor (M14L) (refer

to Note 4) Go to Step 20

20 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the left-hand rear door power window switch S221 – X1 pin 3 and

M14L – X1 pin 2.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 21

Repair or replace

circuit 669 (refer to

Note 2)

21 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the left-hand rear door power window switch S221 – X1 pin 6 and

M14L – X1 pin 1.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 22

Repair or replace

circuit 668 (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–186

Page 12J–186

Step Action Yes No

22 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the left-hand rear door power window motor M14L – X1 pin 1 and

M14L – X1 pin 2.

Does the multimeter display a reading of less than 2 ohms?

Replace left-hand

rear door power

window switch

(refer to Note 4)

Replace the left-

hand rear door

power window

motor (M14L) (refer

to Note 4)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–187

Page 12J–187

5.16 Wiper Systems Intermittent Function

Circuit Description

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Also, refer to Section 12N Wiper, Washer and Horn for general information on wiper, washer systems and wiring

diagrams.

The Diagnostics tables that follow will assist with fault finding problems related to the BCM and A121 Washer Pulse

Control Module. These procedures are not specified within Section 12N Wiper, Washer and Horn diagnostics.

The preliminary test is used to aid in localising the cause to malfunction in the front wipers and washers wiring system

and confirms the serviceability of the wipers and washers control switch.

Introduction

The preliminary test is used to aid in localising the cause to malfunction in the front wipers and washers wiring system

and confirms the serviceability of the wipers and washers control switch.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the accessories power is available at the accessory socket.

3 Checks if the front wipers operate normally.

4 Checks if the wipers operate with the wipers / washer switch in the intermittent position.

5 Checks if the wiper speed increases when the wiper dwell control is operated

6 Checks if the wiper dwell control operates within its limits.

7 Checks if the wipers operate continually when the washers are turned on.

8 Checks if the wipers continue to operate after the washers are turned off.

9 Checks if the wiper dwell time increases with the vehicle road speed.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Switch the ignition to ACC or ON position.

2 Check if the accessories operate (eg. Accessory socket).

Do the accessories operate? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.11

Accessory Power

Control

3 1 Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to position 1.

Do the front wipers operate? Go to Step 4

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

4 1 Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Do the front wipers sweep? Go to Step 5

Refer to

Intermittent

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–188

Page 12J–188

Step Action Yes No

5 Adjust the wiper dwell control to the fastest setting.

Are the wiper sweeps intermittent (not continuous)? Go to Step 6

Refer to

Intermittent

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

6 Turn the wiper / washer to the intermittent position and vary the wiper

dwell control setting from minimum to maximum.

Are the wiper dwell intervals as follows?

• Minimum dwell time: 1 second

• Maximum dwell time: 24 seconds Go to Step 7

Refer to

Intermittent

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

7 1 Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

2 Pull backward the wiper / washer switch and hold for 2 seconds.

Do the front wipers commence continuous operation? Go to Step 8

Refer to

Intermittent

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

8 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Pull backward the wiper / washer switch and hold for 2 seconds.

3 Release the switch and count the number of wiper sweeps.

Do the front wipers continue for three additional sweeps after the

wiper / washer switch was released? Go to Step 9

Refer to

Intermittent

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

9 1 Road test the vehicle with the wiper / washer set to the

intermittent position.

2 Do not adjust the wiper dwell control.

Does the wiper dwell vary as the vehicle speed is varied? System Serviceable

Refer to Road

Speed Diagnostic

Table in this

Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Intermittent Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks if the wipers sweep when the washers are operated.

3 Checks if the wiper arm returns to the park position when accessory power is turned off.

4 Checks if wipers operate intermittently.

5 Checks if wiper power is available at the BCM.

6-7 Checks if the circuits associated with the front washers are serviceable.

8 Checks if the front wiper park switch signal is present at the BCM.

9 Checks using Tech 2 if the front wiper intermittent switch signal is present.

10-13 Checks if the circuits associated with the front wiper intermittent switch are serviceable.

14 Checks using Tech 2 if the front wiper dwell switch voltage is within its limits.

15-17 Checks if the circuits associated with the front wiper / washer are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12N Wipers, Washers and Horn for further information and diagnostics.

Body Control Module Page 12J–189

Page 12J–189

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Pull backward the wiper / washer switch and hold for 2 seconds.

Do the wipers sweep when water is sprayed onto the windscreen? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5

3 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to position 1.

3 Turn the ignition switch off whilst the wiper is operating.

Does the wiper arm return to the park position? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 8

4 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Do the wipers operate intermittently (not continuous)? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 9

5 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15

– X1 pin 2 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 243

(refer to Note 1)

6 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15

– X3 pin 13 and a known ground.

3 Pull backward the wiper / washer switch and hold for 2 seconds.

Does the test lamp illuminate whilst water is sprayed onto the

windscreen? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 7

7 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the wiper / washer switch

S247 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

3 Pull backward the wiper / washer switch.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 228 (refer to

Note 2)

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

8 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

3 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector

A15 – X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp display the following:

• Operating = Test lamp illuminated

• Park = Test lamp not illuminated Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

9 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Wipers / Front

Wiper Intermittent Switch

3 Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

4 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Does Tech 2 display Front Wiper Intermittent On? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 12

Body Control Module Page 12J–190

Page 12J–190

Step Action Yes No

10 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15

– X1 pin 12 and a known ground.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Does the test lamp illuminate when the wipers are operating? Go to Step 11 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

11 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the wiper / washer switch

S247 – X1 pin 9 and a known ground.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Refer to 12N

Wipers, Washers

and Horn

Repair or replace

circuit 96 and or

S247 switch

assembly (refer to

Note 2)

12 1 With the ignition switch turned to ACC

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15

– X3 pin 3 and a known ground.

3 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 13

13 1 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the wiper and washer

control switch S247 – X1 pin 7 and a known ground.

2 Turn the wiper / washer switch to the intermittent position.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 112 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace S247

switch assembly

(refer to Note 2)

14 1 Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Wipers / Front

Wiper Intermittent Sw itch Voltage

3 Vary the wiper dwell control switch on wiper / washer switch

from maximum to minimum dwell time.

Does Tech 2 display a voltage between 0 – 5 V? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 15

15 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

the BCM connector A15 – X2 pin 4 and a known ground.

3 Turn the ignition on.

4 Adjust the wiper dwell control from minimum to maximum.

Does the multimeter display a voltage between 0 – 5 V? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 16

16 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

the dwell control connector A121 – X1 pin A and a known

ground.

3 Turn the ignition on.

4 Adjust the wiper dwell control from minimum to maximum.

Does the multimeter display a voltage between 0 – 5 V?

Repair or replace

circuit 477 (refer to

Note 2) Go to Step 17

17 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the dwell control connector A121 – X1 pin B and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace the wipers

and washers

control switch, refer

to 12N Wipers,

Washer and Horn

Repair or replace

circuit 251 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–191

Page 12J–191

Road Speed Diagnostic Table

Test Description

1 Checks if the wiper dwell control varies with the vehicles speed.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12N Wipers, Washers and Horn for further information and diagnostics.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 1 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Serial Data

Inputs / Vehicle Speed

2 Road test the vehicle.

Does Tech 2 display the correct road speed?

Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Refer to

6C1-2 Engine

Management – V6

– Diagnostics

6C3-2 Engine

Management –

GEN III V8 –

Diagnostics

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–192

Page 12J–192

5.17 Dome Lamp Delay Control

Circuit Description

The interior lighting is controlled by the BCM, or by the dome lamp switch, which switched to ground via two diodes that

are internal in the switch assembly. The dome lamp is brighter when turned on at the roof console assembly as these

diodes are bypassed. These lamps double as map reading lamps.

The interior lighting is activated when:

• Any door is opened

• Any door is unlocked with the remote coded key

• The ignition is switched from ON to the ACC position or off (provided the feature is enabled or the conditions are

sufficiently dark)

• The dome lamp switch is operated.

The interior lighting (dome lamp, roof console assembly or dome and reading lamp assembly) is activated when any door

is open. After all the doors have been closed, the lighting remains activated for an additional 30 seconds (default).

The BCM monitors the doors and the switch settings and controls the dome lamp accordingly.

If the interior lighting has been activated by a BCM control system action, the dome lamp switch turns the interior lighting

off when it is switched from the DOOR to the OFF position. Therefore, this switch can cancel any delay time and switch

the lighting off while a door is open, except if the theft deterrent system has been triggered. In this case, even with the

switch in the OFF position, the dome lamp flashes.

With central door unlocking, the interior lighting is switched on for 30 seconds. If the ignition is turned on during this

period, the interior lighting is switched off immediately. Interior lighting is also switched off with central door locking when

locking occurs (unless the dome lamp switch is turned on or if a door remains open).

There are two interior lamp delay modes: ignition off (Ignition OFF interior lamp time out) and Door Unlock / Close delay

(Interior lamp timeout). These modes of delay times (default 30 seconds) are adjustable by the use of Tech 2 or via the

MFD mode button.

Battery Saver Mode

As part of the battery saver function, the BCM controls internal, dome, ignition lock surround, instrument panel

compartment and door lamps. The BCM controls battery voltage to these circuits via the interior illumination relay.

There is a delay period before the battery saver function of the BCM deactivates the interior illumination relay. The delay

default time is set to 60 minutes. The delay can be reprogrammed with Tech 2 from 3 to 180 minutes. The delay period

starts when the ignition is switched off.

Note the delay default time is set to 3 minutes when the BCM is in pre-delivery mode. The delay time reverts to

60 minutes after the vehicle has exceeded 20 km/h for a total of 30 minutes.

When in battery saver mode, the BCM activates the interior lighting relay when:

• The hood, rear compartment lid or a door is opened,

• A valid remote lock and unlock signal is received,

• The ignition is switched on or to accessories,

• The doors are unlocked via the driver’s door microswitch,

• Tech 2 is connected and communicating with the BCM,

• The headlamp switch is cycled from off to on or on to off,

• The deadlock function is activated,

• The alarm is activated, or

• The rear compartment lid button is pressed.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Body Control Module Page 12J–193

Page 12J–193

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Descriptions

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Ensures the door ajar switches are serviceable.

3 Ensures the accessory power control is serviceable.

4-5 Ensures the roof console assembly lamps illuminates when switched on and extinguishes when switched off.

6 Ensures the roof console assembly lamps illuminates when in the DOOR position when a door is opened.

7 Ensures the roof console assembly lamps illuminates when in the DOOR position when the UNLOCK button on the

remote coded key is pressed.

8 Checks if the roof console assembly lamps illuminates when a door is opened.

9 Checks if the roof console assembly lamps extinguishes after 30 seconds when all doors are closed.

10 Checks if the roof console assembly lamps extinguishes immediately when the ignition is turned on.

11 Checks if the roof console assembly lamps illuminates when the ignition is turned off.

12 Checks if the roof console assembly lamps increase in brightness when the reading lamp switches are operated.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12B Lighting System for further details and disassembly procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Are all door ajar switches and associated circuits functioning

correctly, refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

3 Is the accessory power supply and associated circuits functioning

correctly, refer to 5.11 Accessory Power Control? Go to Step 4

Refer to 5.11

Accessory Power

Control

4 1 Close all the doors.

2 Set the roof console assembly switch to the ON position.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Go to Step 5

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

5 Set the roof console assembly switch to the OFF position.

Do the roof console assembly lamps extinguish? Go to Step 6

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

6 1 With the doors closed, set the roof console assembly switch

from the OFF position to the DOOR position.

2 Open the driver’s door.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Go to Step 7

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

Body Control Module Page 12J–194

Page 12J–194

Step Action Yes No

7 1 Set the roof console assembly switch to the DOOR position.

2 Close and lock the doors.

3 Unlock the doors by pressing the remote key UNLOCK button.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Go to Step 8

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

8 1 With the dome lamp switch set to Door, close the doors but do

not lock them (wait for dome lamp to extinguish).

2 Open the driver’s door.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Go to Step 9

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

9 1 With the dome lamp switch set to Door, open a door to

illuminate the dome lamp.

2 Close all doors.

Do the roof console assembly lamps extinguish after 30 seconds

(default setting)? Go to Step 10

Check the default

setting, if OK,

replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

10 1 With the dome lamp switch set to Door, close the doors but do

not lock them (wait for the dome lamp to extinguish).

2 Use the remote coded key to lock and then unlock the doors.

3 Within 30 seconds, turn the ignition on.

Do the roof console assembly lamps turn off immediately? Go to Step 11

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

11 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 With the dome lamp switch set to Door, close the doors but do

not lock them (wait for the dome lamp to extinguish).

3 Turn the ignition on then off.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Go to Step 12

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

12 Turn the roof console assembly reading lamps switches on.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate at a brighter level than

in Step 11? System Serviceable

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks if the power supply via fuse F6 is serviceable.

3 Checks if the roof console assembly globes are serviceable.

4 Checks if the roof console assembly globes together with the interior lamps illuminate.

5 Checks if the interior lamps besides the roof console assembly globes illuminate.

6 Checks if the circuits between the BCM to the roof console assembly is serviceable.

7-9 Checks if the circuits associated with the illumination relay are serviceable.

10-11 Checks if the power and ground circuits to the roof console assembly switch are serviceable.

12 Checks using Tech 2 if the roof console assembly switch operation is correct.

13-16 Checks if the circuits associated with the roof console assembly switch are serviceable.

Body Control Module Page 12J–195

Page 12J–195

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12B Lighting System for further details and disassembly procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Check the integrity of fuse F6

2 Using a test lamp, probe between the front of the fuse body F6

and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3

Replace fuse F102

or F6 (refer to

Note 1)

3 Check the roof console assembly globes.

Are both globes serviceable? Go to Step 4

Replace blown

globes (refer to

Note 4)

4 Turn the roof console assembly switch to the ON position.

Do the roof console assembly lamps together with the rail reading

lamps and other interior lamps illuminate? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5

5 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X4 pin 21 and a

known ground.

Do the interior lamps besides the roof console assembly lamps,

illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to step 6

6 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

A15 – X4 pin 21 and roof console assembly E67 – X1 pin 2.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 157 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 Turn the roof console assembly switch to the ON position.

2 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 16

and a known ground.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 8

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

A15 – X1 pin 16 and R24 – X38 pin 2.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 1393 (refer

to Note 2)

9 1 Install a known serviceable interior illumination relay (R24).

2 With the roof console assembly switch set to on.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? System Serviceable Go to Step 10

10 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the roof console assembly E67

– X1 pin 1 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 11

Replace R24 with

original relay, repair

or replace circuit

149 (refer to Note

11 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

the roof console assembly E67 – X1 pin 6 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace roof

console assembly

(refer to Note 4)

Repair or replace

circuit 650 (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–196

Page 12J–196

Step Action Yes No

12 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 Turn the roof console assembly switch to the DOOR position

and close the doors.

4 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Inputs and

Outputs

Scroll down and select Dome Lamp Switch.

Does Tech 2 display Dome Lamp Switch Position Door status? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 15

13 1 Ensure the roof console assembly switch set to the DOOR

position.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the roof console

assembly E67 – X1 pin 3 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 14

Replace roof

console assembly

(refer to Note 4)

14 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

A15 – X4 pin 3 and E67 – X1 pin 3.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 328 (refer to

Note 2)

15 1 Ensure the roof console assembly switch set to the DOOR

position.

2 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X4 pin 22

and a known ground.

Do the roof console assembly lamps illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 16

16 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between

A15 – X4 pin 22 and E67 – X1 pin 5.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Replace roof

console assembly

(refer to Note 4)

Repair or replace

circuit 660 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–197

Page 12J–197

5.18 Automatic Lamp Control

Circuit Description

The automatic lamp control includes Automatic Lamps Off, Automatic Lamps On and Approach Illumination features.

Automatic Lamps Off

This feature switches the headlamps and park lamps off automatically; the BCM must sense the following sequence of

events before the lamps are switched off automatically:

• A vehicle road-speed of less than 10 km/h without a sudden loss of speed (ignition being switched off with the

vehicle travelling above 10 km/h).

• The ignition has been switched from on to off and remains off.

• The headlamp switch has not been turned on after the ignition switch was turned off.

• The driver’s door has been opened.

• When the ignition is switched back on, the lamps turn on again based on the mode of headlamp operation and the

position selected on the headlamp switch. Turning the headlamp switch to off deactivates the Automatic Lamps Off

feature.

• In the event of a system failure, the BCM default status of the lamp control output is to on when the ignition is on.

This gives direct control of the lamps to the headlamp switch.

Automatic Lamps On

This feature switches the headlamps and park lamps on automatically based on the outside light level. The headlamp

switch must be in the AUTO position and the ignition switched on to enable this feature. The lamps operate normally in

other switch positions.

A light sensor, located in the instrument panel pad between the demist ducts, monitors the amount of light in front of the

vehicle. The BCM monitors the output of this sensor via BCM A15 – X2 pin 2, circuit 1784 and determines when the light

level is low enough to turn the lamps on. The Automatic Lamps Off feature works normally when Automatic Lamp On is

enabled.

NOTE

The sunload light sensor is part of B55, the

sensor assembly headlamp automatic controller.

Adjustment

If the headlamps are turning on too early (during daylight) or too late (after dusk), adjust the on / off light level to suit the

customer preferences. Tech 2 can be used to select the sensitivity value; adjust the value down to turn the headlamps on

later, or up to turn the headlamps on earlier.

NOTE

The sensitivity range is 0 – 7. If a sensitivity value

of 8 or 9 is selected, the value will default to 0.

Approach Illumination

This feature turns the vehicle headlamps and/or park lamps on (based on the position of the headlamp switch) for

30 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the remote coded key, to provide additional illumination when

approaching the vehicle at night.

The lamps turn off again if the vehicle is locked with the remote coded key within 30 seconds of the approach illumination

feature being activated. The lamps turn on for a further 30 seconds with subsequent operation of the remote coded key

UNLOCK button.

The approach illumination feature only operates during dark conditions, as determined by the BCM via the light sensor.

Tech 2 can be used to enable and disable this feature.

The lamps resume to normal operation when the ignition is switched on.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Body Control Module Page 12J–198

Page 12J–198

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Ensures the door ajar switches are serviceable.

3 Ensures the remote coded key is operating correctly.

4 Ensures the headlamps are operating correctly.

5 Checks if the sunload light sensor when covered causes the headlamps to turn on.

6 Checks if the sunload light sensor when uncovered causes the headlamps to turn off.

7 Checks if the headlamps turn on for the preset time (as programmed for approach illumination).

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Are all door ajar switches and associated circuits functioning correctly,

refer to 5.12 Central Door Locking? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

3 Is the remote coded key operating correctly, refer to 5.10 Remote

Receiver / Key? Go to Step 4

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

4 Do the headlamps function correctly when the headlamp switch is in

the ON or OFF position? Go to Step 5 Refer to

12B Lighting System

5 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 Turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position.

3 Cover the sunload light sensor.

Do the headlamps turn on? Go to Step 6

Refer to Sunload

Sensor Diagnostic

Table in this Section

6 1 Uncover the sunload light sensor.

2 Shine a bright light onto the sunload light sensor.

NOTE

A bright light will be necessary in the above step, if the

vehicle is parked inside a garage for the Auto Lamps On

function to operate.

Do the headlamps turn off after approx 5 seconds? Go to Step 7

Refer to Sunload

Sensor Diagnostic

Table in this Section

7 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch to the ON position.

3 Cover the sunload light sensor.

4 Lock the doors using the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

5 Unlock the doors using the UNLOCK button on the remote

coded key.

Do the headlamps turn on for 10 seconds and then turn off? (The

period of time will vary depending on approach illumination delay time

programmed settings.) System Serviceable

Refer to Lamps On /

Lamps Off

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–199

Page 12J–199

Sunload Sensor Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks using Tech 2 if the sunload light sensor is operating within its limits.

3-5 Checks if the circuits associated with the sunload sensor are serviceable.

6 Checks if the sunload light sensor is operating correctly.

7 Checks if the circuits between the sunload sensor and the BCM is serviceable

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12B Lighting System for further details and disassembly procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 On Tech 2 select:

Data Display / Headlamps

Scroll down and select Ambient Light.

2 Cover the light sensor.

3 Uncover and shine a bright light onto the sunload light sensor.

NOTE

A bright light will be necessary in the above step, if the

vehicle is parked inside a garage for the Auto Lamps On

function to operate.

Does Tech 2 display the following ambient light readings?

• Covered = Less than 50 Lux

• Uncovered = 50 – 6000 Lux Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Using a fuse test lead, backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 6 and a know

ground

Do the headlamps turn on? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Refer to Lamps On /

Lamps Off

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

4 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

A15 – X2 pin 2 and a known ground.

2 Turn the ignition on.

3 Cover the light sensor.

4 Uncover and shine a bright light onto the sunload light sensor.

Does the multimeter display the following voltages?

• Covered = less than 0.5 V.

• Uncovered = 0.5 V – 5 V Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 5

Body Control Module Page 12J–200

Page 12J–200

Step Action Yes No

5 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the sunload light sensor

connector B55 –X1 pin 6 and a known ground.

NOTE

Refer to 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for removal

procedure for the sunload sensor / remote receiver

assembly.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6

Repair or replace

circuit 740 (refer to

Note 2

6 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, backprobe between

the light sensor B55 – X1 pin 4 and a known ground.

2 Cover the light sensor.

3 Uncover and shine a bright light onto the light sensor.

Does the multimeter display the following voltages?

• Covered = less than 0.5 V.

• Uncovered = above 0.5 V – 5 V Go to Step 7

Replace sunload

light sensor / remote

receiver module

Refer to 1A3

Instrument Panel

and Console

7 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 1784.

Is the circuit serviceable? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 1784 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Lamps On / Lamps Off Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2-3 Checks with Tech 2 if the headlamps turn on.

4-6 Checks if the circuits associated with the automatic lights on are serviceable.

7 Checks with Tech 2 if the headlamps turn off.

8 Checks if the circuits associated with the automatic lights off are serviceable.

9 Checks with Tech 2 if the headlamps off delay feature operates correctly.

10 Checks with Tech 2 if the approach illumination delay feature operates correctly.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12B Lighting System for further details and disassembly procedures.

Body Control Module Page 12J–201

Page 12J–201

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Lamps /

Auto Lights On.

4 Turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position.

5 Press the Auto Headlamp Drive ON soft key.

Do the headlamps turn on? (They will stay on for 5 seconds before

turning off.)

Refer to Sunload

Sensor Diagnostic

Table in this Section Go to Step 3

3 1 Cover the sunload light sensor B55.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Data Display / Headlamps

Scroll down and select Auto Headlamp Drive.

3 Turn the ignition on.

Does Tech 2 display Auto Headlamp Drive On? Go to Step 4

Refer to Sunload

Sensor Diagnostic

Table in this Section

4 1 Turn the headlamp switch to the AUTO position.

2 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 6 and

a known ground.

Do the headlamps turn on? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 5

5 Check the headlamp switch assembly is serviceable, refer to 12B

Lighting.

Is the headlamp switch assembly serviceable? Go to Step 6

Replace the

headlamp switch

(refer to Note 4)

6 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 103.

Is the circuit serviceable? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 103 (refer to

Note 2)

7 1 On Tech 2 select:

Miscellaneous Tests / Lamps / Auto Lights On.

2 Turn the ignition on.

3 Turn the headlamp switch to AUTO.

4 Cover the sunload light sensor.

5 Press the Auto Headlamps drive OFF soft key.

Do the headlamps turn off? (They will stay off for 5 seconds before

turning on.)

Refer to Sunload

Sensor Diagnostic

Table in this Section Go to Step 8

8 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 306.

Is the circuit serviceable? Go to Step 9

Repair or replace

circuit 306 (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–202

Page 12J–202

Step Action Yes No

9 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Program / User Settings / Headlamps Off Delay Time

3 Set the delay time to 5 seconds.

4 With the headlamp switch in the AUTO position, cover the light

sensor to turn on the headlamps.

5 Turn the ignition off.

6 Open then close the driver’s door.

Do the headlamps turn off after 5 seconds? Go to Step 10 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

10 1 On Tech 2 select

Approach Illumination Delay Time

2 Set the delay time to 10 seconds.

3 Turn the headlamp switch to the ON position.

4 Turn the ignition off.

5 Close all doors.

6 Open then close the driver’s door.

7 Wait for the headlamps to turn off.

8 Lock the doors using the LOCK button on the remote coded key.

9 Unlock the doors using the UNLOCK button on the remote

coded key.

Do the headlamps turn on for 10 seconds? — Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–203

Page 12J–203

5.19 Instrument Dimming Control

Circuit Description

The BCM regulates the illumination level of the instrument dial faces and the backlighting of the MFD and LCD’s. The

illumination level is transmitted from the BCM via the secondary data bus and the receiving assemblies read the signal

and adjust the illumination level accordingly. The BCM illumination drive controls the instrumentation and centre-console

illumination, the display window of the trip computer, the radio illumination, and the occupant climate control (OCC)

display (only on vehicles fitted with OCC).

Two momentary contact switches in the headlamp switch change the illumination intensity up and down to adjust the level

of brightness.

The dimmer drives to 100% when the ignition is on and the park lamps are off. This enables maximum brightness for the

trip computer, radio illumination and OCC display. When the park lamps are switched on, the dimmer operates according

to the previously set percentage value. This intensity value is based on the Priority key used.

The dimmer control inputs are resistor encoded onto one input line. A bright input occurs when DIM+ is activated and

there is a 0 Ω reference to the park lamp control output. A dull output occurs when DIM– is activated and there is a

2700 Ω reference to the park lamp control output. The resting point of this line is 5400 Ω. The dimmer default is 100%

when the circuit for this line is open. The default dimmer is 100%, which occurs if the battery or BCM is disconnected.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Ensures all illuminated switches are serviceable.

3 Ensures the instrument clusters MFD is illuminated.

4-5 Checks if the dimmer slider on the headlamp switch is operating within its limits.

6 Checks if the priority keys 1 and 2 preset to the desired programmed instrument illumination setting.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Are all illuminated switches serviceable, refer to 12B Lighting System? Go to Step 3 Repair or replace

as required.

3 Turn the ignition on.

Does the instrument clusters MFD illuminate? Go to Step 4 Refer to

12C Instrumentation

4 With both the ignition and the park lamps turned on, move and hold

the light dimmer slider (part of the headlamp switch assembly)

upwards.

Does the illumination level ramp up to full intensity? Go to Step 5

Refer in Main

Diagnostic Table

this Section

5 With both the ignition and the park lamps turned on, move and hold

the light intensity slider downwards.

Does the illumination level fade to minimum intensity (35%)? Go to Step 6

Refer in Main

Diagnostic Table

this Section

6 When operating the Priority 1 and Priority 2 keys, is the illumination

intensity as set for each key? System Serviceable

Refer to

5.21 Priority

Key System

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–204

Page 12J–204

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2-3 Checks using Tech 2 if the instrument illumination operates within its limits.

4-6 Checks if the circuits associated with the instrument illumination are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12B Lighting System for further details and disassembly procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition and park lamps.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Lamps /

Instrument Illumination

4 Perform the test as directed by Tech 2 and vary the light

intensity from minimum to maximum.

Does Tech 2 display?

• Minimum = 35%

• Maximum = 100% Go to Step 3 Go to Step 6

3 1 On Tech 2 select:

Data Display / Instrument Illumination / Instrument

Illumination Switch Voltage.

2 Perform the test as directed by Tech 2 and vary the light

intensity up and down.

Does Tech 2 display the following?

• Minimum = 1 V

• Maximum = 3.5 V Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 4

4 Check for a short to ground or open circuit in circuit 44.

Is the circuit serviceable?

Replace the

headlamp switch

assembly (refer to

Note 4)

Repair or replace

circuit 44 (refer to

Note 2)

5 When performing the Tech 2 Instrument Illumination test, did the light

intensity alter slightly but not through the full range? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 6

6 1 Turn the ignition and the park lamps on

2 Using a fused test lead backprobe between A15 – X1 pin 5 and

a known ground.

Does the backlighting of the control switches illuminate at full

intensity? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 230 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–205

Page 12J–205

5.20 OPS Deployment Vehicle Shutdown

Circuit Description

In the event of (OPS) Occupant Protection System deployment, the sensing diagnostic module (SDM) sends serial data

via the tertiary serial data bus to the BCM. Within the BCM, the tertiary serial data bus is linked to the primary and

secondary serial data buses. The SDM advises various vehicle systems to take appropriate shutdown action and signals

the BCM to illuminate the OPS indicator in the instrument cluster.

Once the appropriate data is identified and the vehicle speed has been 0 km/h for 10 seconds, the BCM turns the dome

lamp on continuously and unlocks the doors.

The dome lamp will be switched off when the ignition switch is cycled from off to on or when the BCM is reset (i.e. due to

battery disconnection). For further information on this system, refer to Section 12M Occupant Protection System.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Ensures the central locking system is serviceable.

3 Ensures the dome lamps are operating correctly.

4-6 Checks that communication exists between BCM, occupant protection system and Instrumentation.

7-8 Checks if circuits between BCM, occupant protection system and Instrumentation are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Is the Central Door Locking system fully functional, refer to

5.12 Central Door Locking? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

3 Are the dome lamps functioning correctly, refer to 5.17 Dome Lamp

Delay Control? Go to Step 4 Refer to 5.17 Dome

Lamp Delay Control

4 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module

3 Turn the ignition on.

Does the screen display BCM system identification? Go to Step 5

Refer to 5.9 Serial

Data

Communications

5 1 With the ignition on

2 On Tech 2 select:

SRS

Does Tech 2 display SRS system identification? Go to Step 6

Refer to 12M

Occupant Protection

System

Body Control Module Page 12J–206

Page 12J–206

Step Action Yes No

6 1 With the ignition on

2 On Tech 2 select:

Instruments

Does Tech 2 display Instrumentation system identification? Go to Step 7 Refer to 12C

Instrumentation

7 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between BCM connector A15 – X2 pin 9 and A15 – X2 pin 6.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 8 Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

8 1 With the ignition turned off.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between BCM connector A15 – X2 pin 6 and SDM connector

A65 – X1 pin 9.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Refer to 12M

Occupant Protection

System

Repair or replace

circuit 774 (refer to

Note 2)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–207

Page 12J–207

5.21 Priority Key System

Circuit Description

The BCM remembers two sets of key operating parameters. These operating parameters are recalled when a specific

remote coded key is used. When a Priority 1 remote coded key is used, the BCM recalls the operating parameters

related to the Priority 1 key. When a Priority 2 key is used, the BCM recalls the operating parameters related to the

Priority 2 key.

The operating parameters are recalled when the remote coded key UNLOCK button is pressed or when the ignition is

turned to the accessory position. All operating parameters are maintained on a last used basis.

The BCM also communicates with other modules via the serial data bus, ensuring that each module is in the correct

mode.

When a new remote key is programmed, it is assigned as the Priority 1 key and all remaining remote keys become

Priority 2 keys.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Diagnostic Table

Complete the following steps before proceeding with the Priority Key System diagnostic chart:

1 Have both remote keys at hand.

2 Ensure that both keys have serviceable batteries fitted.

3 Operate the UNLOCK button on the first remote coded key.

4 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

5 Insert the first remote coded key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition on.

6 Using Tech 2, program this key to Priority 1.

On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Program / Set Key to Priority 1

7 Turn the ignition off.

8 Set the priority functions for this key (i.e. instrument illumination level, auto headlamp off delay, antenna height,

radio stations, two-stage unlock, lamp delay times and TCS).

9 Remove the first remote coded key and lock the doors.

10 Press the UNLOCK button on the second remote coded key.

11 Insert the second remote coded key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition on.

12 Set the priority functions for this key.

NOTE: If the Priority settings cannot be set, refer 5.9 Serial Data Communications.

If a required function operates from one key but not the other key and it is established that both keys are fully operational,

replace the BCM. (refer to Note 3)

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Display the preset Priority 1 key user settings with Tech 2 connected.

3 Display the preset Priority 2 key user settings with Tech 2 connected.

4-14 Checks and recalls all the preset user settings for both Priority 1 and 2 keys.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Body Control Module Page 12J–208

Page 12J–208

Diagnostic Table

NOTE

With all of these steps there needs to be a

predefined difference between each of these

parameters.

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display

Scroll down and select Priority 1 user settings

3 Does Tech 2 display all Priority key 1-user settings? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

3 On Tech 2 select:

Priority 2 user settings

Does Tech 2 display all Priority Key 2 user settings? Go to Step 4

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

4 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the instrument illumination level is as

set for each key.

Is the instrument illumination level recalled for both keys? Go to Step 5

Refer to 5.19

Instrument Dimming

Control

5 1 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2

remote coded keys alternately.

2 Switch on the radio after using each key.

3 Check the antenna height is as set for each key.

Is the antenna height recalled for both keys? Go to Step 6 Refer to 5.15 Power

Window System

6 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the approach illumination delay is as

set for each key.

Is the approach illumination delay recalled for both keys? Go to Step 7

Refer to 5.18

Automatic Lamp

Control

7 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the automatic headlamp off delay is

as set for each key.

Is the automatic headlamp off delay recalled for both keys? Go to Step 8

Refer to 5.18

Automatic Lamp

Control

8 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the interior lamp timeout is as set for

each key.

Is the interior lamp timeout recalled for both keys? Go to Step 9 Refer to 5.17 Dome

Lamp Delay Control

9 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the two stage unlock settings are as

set for each key.

Are the two stage unlock settings recalled for both keys? Go to Step 10

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

10 With Tech 2 connected, operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1

and Priority 2 remote coded keys alternately, checking the door lock

indication is as set for each key.

Is the door lock indication recalled for both keys? Go to Step 11

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

Body Control Module Page 12J–209

Page 12J–209

Step Action Yes No

11 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the Autolock in drive settings are as

set for each key.

Are the Autolock in drive settings recalled for both keys? Go to Step 12

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

12 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the accessory relay timeout is as set

for each key.

Is the accessory relay timeout recalled for both keys? Go to Step 13

Refer to 5.11

Accessory Power

Control

13 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the auto headlamps off timing is as

set for each key.

Is the auto headlamps off setting recalled for both keys? Go to Step 14

Refer to 5.11

Accessory Power

Control

14 Operate the UNLOCK button on the Priority 1 and Priority 2 remote

coded keys alternately, checking the trip computer mode and

overspeed settings are as set for each key.

Is the trip computer mode and overspeed settings recalled for both

keys? System Serviceable Refer to 12C

Instrumentation

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–210

Page 12J–210

5.22 Power Antenna Control

Circuit Description

The antenna up and down request signals are communicated from the radio to the BCM via the serial communications

bus. When the unlock button on the remote key is pressed, the antenna height is recalled based on which key is used

(Priority 1 or Priority 2).

During engine starting, the on signal is momentarily lost but the BCM assumes the signal is still active when it senses

both ignition and accessory inputs as well as the radio / CD player status signal. This enables uninterrupted antenna

operation and control during engine cranking.

When the antenna down switch is pressed, the radio / CD player sends a Down input signal to the BCM through the

secondary data bus.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Diagnostic Table

Test Description

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Check the accessory power control is serviceable.

3-6 Check the operation of the power antenna when the radio is turned on.

NOTE

For detailed Diagnostics and fault finding on the

Power Antenna Control this information can be

found within Section 12D Entertainment Systems

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Is the accessory control circuit functioning correctly refer to 5.11

Accessory Power Control? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.11

Accessory Power

Control

3 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.

2 Turn on the radio.

Does the antenna mast extend automatically? Go to Step 4

Refer to 12D

Entertainment

Systems

4 Turn off the radio.

Does the antenna start retracting within 3 seconds? Go to Step 5

Refer to 12D

Entertainment

Systems

5 1 With the ignition turned to accessories, turn on the radio.

2 Operate the radio or audio head antenna down switch.

Does the antenna mast retract? Go to Step 6

Refer to 12D

Entertainment

Systems

6 1 With the ignition turned to accessories and the radio on

2 Operate the radio or audio head antenna up switch.

Does the antenna mast extend? System Serviceable

Refer to 12D

Entertainment

Systems

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–211

Page 12J–211

5.23 Rear Lamp Failure Warning System

Circuit Description

NOTE

Rear Lamp Failure Warning System is only fitted

to Statesman level 4 vehicles. Caprice level 5

vehicles have LED rear stop and tail lamps fitted.

The BCM monitors current flow of the tail, stop and licence plate lamps for bulb failure, poor power, ground circuits and

fuse integrity. When the ignition is turned on, the MFD displays the appropriate warning via data from the instrument

cluster. Refer to Section 12C Instrumentation.

If battery voltage is not present at either the park lamp and stop lamp BCM inputs when the ignition is on, the BCM

determines that one of these two fuses has failed. The BCM then signals the instrument cluster via the secondary serial

data bus that a fuse is faulty

When the parking lamps are turned on, the BCM checks the current flowing through the lamp circuits. If this

current does not match the pre-learnt current flow, the BCM signals the instrument cluster (and MFD). Refer to

6.4 Bulb Re-learn Procedure Rear Lamp Warning Failure System.

When the brake pedal is pressed, battery voltage is applied to the ABS or ABS / TCS control module, which sends a

signal to the BCM via the secondary serial data bus. The BCM interprets this signal as the stop lamp switch input signal

and checks the current flowing through the rear lamp circuits. If this current does not match the pre-learnt current flow,

the BCM signals the instrument cluster.

If one of these fault signals is received, the MFD displays the following appropriate warning message, and an icon:

• Rear Brake Bulb Fail,

• Rear Lamp Bulb Fail, and/or

• Rear Lamp Fuse Fail.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Descriptions

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2-4 Checks if the rear lamp failure warning system displays any warnings when the system is operating normally.

5-7 Checks if the rear lamp failure warning system displays a warning when a fuse, lamp or circuit is faulty.

NOTE

This test presumes that all globes are

serviceable.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Is the instrument cluster’s MFD functioning correctly, refer to

12C Instrumentation? Go to Step 3 Refer to 12C

Instrumentation

3 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch off.

3 Ensure the brake pedal is in its rest position.

4 Turn on the ignition.

Does the MFD display Rear Lamp Fuse Fail warning?

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section Go to Step 4

Body Control Module Page 12J–212

Page 12J–212

Step Action Yes No

4 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the park lamps on.

3 Turn the ignition on.

Does the MFD display the Rear Lamp Bulb Fail warning?

Refer to

Main Diagnostic

Table in this Section Go to Step 5

5 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch off.

3 Remove a rear tail lamp bulb.

4 Turn the park lamps on.

5 Turn the ignition on.

Does the MFD display the Rear Lamp Bulb Fail warning? Go to Step 6

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

6 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch off.

3 Install the rear tail lamp bulb.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Press the brake pedal.

Does the MFD display the Rear Brake Bulb Fail warning?

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section Go to Step 7

7 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch off.

3 Remove a brake lamp bulb.

4 Turn the ignition on.

5 Press the brake pedal.

Does the MFD display the Rear Brake Bulb Fail warning? System Serviceable

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Descriptions

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2-3 Checks using Tech 2 if the rear brake lamp fuse and associated circuits are serviceable.

4-5 Checks using Tech 2 if the rear park lamp fuse and associated circuits are serviceable.

6-8 Checks using Tech 2 if the rear lamp bulb failure and associated circuits are serviceable.

9-10 Checks if the circuits associated with the rear park lamp bulb sense are serviceable.

11 Checks using Tech 2 if the brake lamp bulb failure and associated circuits are serviceable.

12 Checks if the circuits associated with the stop lamp bulb sense are serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 12C Instrumentation for further details and disassembly procedures.

5 Refer to Section 12E Cruise Control for stop lamp switch assembly diagnosis.

Body Control Module Page 12J–213

Page 12J–213

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the headlamp switch off.

3 Ensure the brake pedal is in its rest position.

4 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

5 Turn the ignition on.

6 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Data Display / Rear Lamp

Failure / Rear Brake Lamp Fuse.

Does Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 Turn the ignition on.

2 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15 –

X3 pin 5 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 640 (refer to

Note 1)

4 On Tech 2 Select:

Data Display / Rear Lamp Failure / Rear Park Lamp Fuse

Does Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15 – X3

pin 12 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 840 (refer to

Note 1)

6 1 Ensure the headlamp switch is off and the brake pedal is in its

rest position.

2 On Tech 2 Select:

Normal Mode / Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

3 Turn the ignition off then on.

Does the Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 1 Press the brake pedal.

2 With Tech 2 still displaying Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

Does the Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 11

Check for poor bulb

contacts.

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

8 1 Check the operation of all rear tail lamp bulbs by turning on the

park lamp switch.

2 Replace any faulty tail lamp bulbs as required.

3 Perform the relearn procedure as detailed in 6.4 Bulb Re-learn

Procedure Rear Lamp Warning Failure System.

4 Ensure the brake pedal is in its rest position.

5 Turn the park lamp switch on.

6 With Tech 2 still displaying Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

Does the Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 9 —

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe between the

harness A15 – X1 pin 11 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Go to Step 10

Repair or replace

circuit 151 (refer to

Note 2)

Body Control Module Page 12J–214

Page 12J–214

Step Action Yes No

10 1 Using a fused test lead backprobe between BCM connector

A15 – X4 pin 24 and a known ground.

2 Turn the park lamps on.

Do all the rear park lamps illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuits 1251 and /

or 9 (including R18

park lamp relay)

(refer to Note 2)

11 1 Check the operation of all brake lamp bulbs by pressing the

brake pedal.

2 Replace any faulty stop lamp bulbs as required.

3 Perform the relearn procedure as detailed in 6.4 Bulb Re-learn

Procedure Rear Lamp Warning Failure System.

4 Press the brake pedal.

5 With Tech 2 still displaying Rear Lamp Bulb Fail.

Does the Tech 2 display Failed? Go to Step 12 —

12 1 Using a fused test lead, backprobe between BCM connector

A15 – X4 pin 24 and a known ground.

2 Press the brake pedal.

Do all the brake lamps illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3)

Repair or replace

circuit 20 (including

stop lamp switch

assembly) (refer to

Note 5)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–215

Page 12J–215

5.24 Hazard Lamp Control

Circuit Description

The BCM drives the simultaneous operation of the left and right turn signal lamps when the BCM receives a ground (on)

signal from the hazard warning switch, or a valid RF signal as:

• the theft deterrent system is being armed,

• the doors are being deadlocked,

• the remote coded key UNLOCK button is pressed, and

• the remote coded key LOCK button is pressed.

NOTE

When the vehicle is being passively armed, the

turn signal lamps are not automatically operated.

When the hazard warning switch is activated, the BCM receives a hazard lamp on request and activates the internal

hazard/theft indicator relay to simultaneously flash the left and right turn signal lamps.

NOTE

It is assumed that all turn signal lamps are

serviceable. If any globes need replacing, refer to

Section 12B Lighting System.

Refer to 3 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Charts to aid diagnosis.

Preliminary Diagnostic Table

Test Descriptions

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the remote coded key is serviceable.

3 Checks the central locking system is serviceable.

4-5 Checks that all turn signal lamps flash when the remote coded key buttons are pressed.

6 Checks the hazard warning switch is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to

5.6 Diagnostic

System Check

2 Does the remote key function correctly, refer to 5.10 Remote

Receiver / Key? Go to Step 3

Refer to 5.10

Remote Receiver /

Key

3 Does the central locking system operate correctly, refer to 5.12

Central Door Locking? Go to Step 4

Refer to 5.12

Central Door

Locking

4 1 Close all doors.

2 With the doors unlocked, press the remote coded key LOCK

button.

Do the turn signal lamps flash? Go to Step 5

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

5 In Step 3, did only one side of the turn signal lamps flash? Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section Go to Step 6

Body Control Module Page 12J–216

Page 12J–216

Step Action Yes No

6 Press the hazard warning switch to activate the hazard lamps.

Do all the turn signal lamps flash and continue to flash? System Serviceable

Refer to Main

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Main Diagnostic Table

Test Descriptions

The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Ensures the preliminary diagnostics tests have been performed.

2 Checks with Tech 2 if hazard / turn signal lamps illuminate.

3 Checks if turn indicator power is available at the BCM

4 Checks if the power supply circuits and fuse F7 are serviceable.

5-7 Checks that all left-hand side and right-hand side turn signal lamps illuminate.

8-10 Checks if the hazard switch is serviceable.

Diagnostic Table Notes

1 Refer to Section 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses for harness routeing.

2 Refer to Section 12P Wiring Diagrams for wiring harness repairs.

3 To replace the BCM, refer to 6 Service Operations.

4 Refer to Section 1A3 Instrument Panel and Console for further details and disassembly procedures.

Diagnostic Table

Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Preliminary Diagnostic Test been performed?

Go to Step 2

Refer to Preliminary

Diagnostic Table in

this Section

2 1 Switch the ignition off.

2 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

3 On Tech 2 select:

Body / Body Control Module / Miscellaneous Tests / Lamps

Scroll down and select Indicators

4 On Tech 2 press the indicator On soft key.

Do the turn signal lamps illuminate (for approx 5 seconds)? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3

3 Using a test lamp, backprobe between the BCM connector A15 – X1

pin 13 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 4

4 1 With the ignition on.

2 Using a test lamp, probe between the front of fuse body F7 and

a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate?

Repair or replace

circuit 140 (refer to

Note 2)

Repair or replace

fuses F7 or F102)

(refer to Note 1)

Body Control Module Page 12J–217

Page 12J–217

Step Action Yes No

5 1 With the hazard warning switch off.

2 Operate the turn signal and headlamp dip switch to operate the

turn signal lamps in both left and right positions.

Do the left and right turn signal lamps operate? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 6

6 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the hazard lamps off.

3 Using a test lead connected to battery voltage backprobe

between the BCM connector A15 – X1 pin 4 and a known

ground.

Do the left side turn signal lamps illuminate? Go to Step 7

Repair or replace

circuit 1314 (refer to

Note 2)

Refer to

12B Lighting System

7 1 Turn the ignition off.

2 Turn the hazard lamps off.

3 Using a test lead connected to battery voltage backprobe

between the BCM connector A15 – X1 pin 3 and a known

ground.

Do the right side turn signal lamps illuminate? Go to Step 8

Repair or replace

circuit 1315 (refer to

Note 2)

Refer to

12B Lighting System

8 Press the hazard warning switch.

Do the turn signal lamps flash simultaneously? — Go to Step 9

9 1 With the hazard warning switch pressed.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between the BCM connector A15 – X3 pin 16 and a known

ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity? Replace the BCM

(refer to Note 3) Go to Step 10

10 1 With the hazard warning switch pressed.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, backprobe

between the hazard switch assembly S120 – X1 pin 5 and a

known ground.

Does the multimeter display continuity?

Repair or replace

circuit 111 (refer to

Note 2)

Replace the hazard

warning switch

assembly (refer to

Note 4)

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

Body Control Module Page 12J–218

Page 12J–218

6 Service Operations

6.1 Body Control Module

Mounting Location

The BCM is located under the right-hand side of the instrument panel, positioned vertically behind the fuse panel.

The BCM has four wiring harness connectors: A15 – X1, A15 – X2, A15 – X3 and A15 – X4. For a list of each terminal

within these connectors, and their associated circuit and function, refer to 3.5 Connector Information.

BCM Preliminary Information

The main pow er supply to the BCM is via fuse

F31. Other power supplies to the BCM also

exist and so disconnection of the battery is

necessary before disconnection of the BCM.

1 Never subject the BCM to temperatures above 85°C (such as in a paint oven). If this temperature is to be

exceeded, remove the BCM first.

2 For normal use, ensure that all wiring harness connectors are fitted solidly and the battery terminals are thoroughly

clean and fitted firmly.

3 Disconnect the battery when charging it. Refer to Section 00 Warning, Cautions and Notes.

4 Never connect or disconnect the BCM wiring harness connector while the ignition is switched on.

5 Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.

6 Connecting the battery will reset the following functions:

• Antenna height (resets to maximum)

• Instrument illumination value (resets to default)

• Various instrumentation values. Refer to Section 12C Instrumentation

7 Following battery connection, the BCM relearn procedure will be required for the following systems:

• Stop lamp monitoring (relearns the current draw) (Only on vehicles with rear lamp failure monitoring).

• Park lamps (relearns the current draw) (Only on vehicles rear lamp failure monitoring).

• Wiper dwell (relearns the dwell interval value).

Body Control Module Page 12J–219

Page 12J–219

Remove

Access to BCM without Disconnection

If accessing the BCM but not removing it (i.e. to carry out BCM diagnostic checks as outlined in some tests in this

Section), perform only Steps 6 and 7 of the removal procedure.

Removal

NOTE

If the BCM is being removed and being replaced

by a new BCM, start at Step 1. If the original BCM

is to be installed again, start at Step 4

1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Perform the Tech 2 Learn BCM Settings procedure. Refer to 4.8 Program – Learn BCM settings.

3 Before disconnecting the battery, refer to Section 00 Warnings, Cautions and Notes.

4 Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

5 From beneath the instrument panel remove the scrivets securing the bottom (foot well) cover, and remove the

cover.

6 Remove the screw (1) attaching the BCM (3) to the

instrument panel bracket outer brace.

7 Release the two rear retaining tangs (2) and gently

manoeuvre the BCM from the top mounting bracket.

(Remember the wiring harness is still connected.)

8 Disconnect the four wiring harness connectors by

pressing each connector tang and pulling the

connector away from the module.

Figure 12J – 45

Reinstall

1 Install the BCM in the reverse of the removal procedure ensuring the lugs adjacent to the retaining tangs are

correctly located.

2 Ensure the BCM is firmly installed in the mounting brackets.

Body control module

retaining screw torque specification..................1 – 3 Nm

3 Perform the appropriate following procedure, based on whether the BCM is the one previously fitted (original) or a

replacement (new).

Original BCM

Perform the Learnt BCM Settings procedure. Refer to 4.8 Program – Learn BCM settings.

Body Control Module Page 12J–220

Page 12J–220

Replacement BCM (New)

NOTE

The replacement BCM must be the same feature

level as the removed BCM. Tech 2 will identify an

incorrect BCM and display a mismatch.

1 Connect Tech 2.

2 Perform the Program Learnt BCM Settings procedure, refer to 4.8 Program.

3 Perform the BCM linking procedure, refer to 4.9 Security.

4 Perform the BCM Relearn Procedure. Refer to the BCM Relearn Procedure in this Section.

For additional information regarding Tech 2, refer to Section 0C Tech 2.

BCM Relearn Procedure

The following procedure must be carried out if the battery has been disconnected, or upon the installation of a BCM.

1 Ensure that all rear lights are working.

2 Ensure the ignition is off, park lamps are off and the brake pedal is at rest with the stop lights off.

3 Remove and install fuse F31 in the engine compartment fuse and relay panel assembly.

4 Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.

5 Press the brake pedal and hold for 5 seconds. Release the brake pedal.

6 Turn the park lamps on and leave on for 5 seconds.

7 With the park lamps still on, press the brake pedal and hold for 5 seconds. Release the brake pedal and turn the

park lamps off.

8 Turn the wipers to the intermittent position and turn the windscreen wiper dwell control fully clockwise and hold for

5 seconds, then turn it fully anticlockwise and hold for 5 seconds. Turn the wipers off.

9 Turn the ignition off.

Body Control Module Page 12J–221

Page 12J–221

6.2 Remote Coded Key

Key Replacement

NOTE

The remote coded key holder is a sealed for life

unit with a non-removable battery, and the

housing cannot be separated. The battery life

expectancy is approximately five to ten years.

NOTE

Replacement of a Remote Coded Key will

necessitate programming the BCM to accept the

new key holder’s serial output data.

Programming of the remote coded key holder

can only be performed by an authorised Holden

service outlet or authorised locksmiths, when

provided with the correct security information.

1 Loosen and remove the two (posi-drive) screws (1),

securing the key to the remote coded key holder.

2 Pull the key shaft from the key holder.

3 Assemble the key into the new remote key holder.

4 Insert the two (posi-drive) screws and start the threads

by hand. Tighten the screws to the correct torque

specification. Discard the unserviceable key holder.

Remote coded key holder

screw torque specification...................... 0.7 – 0.9 Nm

Figure 12J – 46

Body Control Module Page 12J–222

Page 12J–222

6.3 Power Window A and B Door Pillar

Wiring Loom Connectors

A Pillar X500 and X600 Connectors

Remove

1 Carefully prise the rubber door loom grommet (1) from

the front door - frame hinge area.

2 Using a screwdriver release the plastic retaining clip to

remove the wiring harness from the door frame.

3 Pull the wiring harness through the hole until the in

line connectors are located.

Reinstall

Reinstallation is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Figure 12J – 47

Body Control Module Page 12J–223

Page 12J–223

B Pillar X700 and X800 Connectors

Remove

1 Carefully prise the rubber door loom grommet (1) from

the rear door - frame hinge area.

2 Using a screwdriver release the plastic retaining clip to

remove the wiring harness from the door frame.

3 Pull the wiring harness through the hole until the in

line connectors are located.

Reinstall

Reinstallation is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Figure 12J – 48

Body Control Module Page 12J–224

Page 12J–224

6.4 Bulb Re-learn Procedure Rear Lamp

Warning Failure System

Carry out this procedure if the battery has been disconnected.

1 Ensure the battery is fully charged and functional.

2 Ensure all rear light bulbs are working. Replace or

repair any faulty bulbs or wiring.

3 Turn the ignition OFF, park lamps OFF and brake

pedal is at rest (stop lamps off).

4 For vehicles fitted with Telematics, enable the

Service mode. Refer to Section 12K Telematics.

5 Remove and install fuse F29 from the engine

compartment relay housing, to reset the BCM.

6 Start the engine and allow it to idle.

7 Switch the park lamps ON.

8 Wait 5 seconds.

9 Press brake pedal and hold it down.

10 Wait 5 seconds.

11 Switch the park lamps OFF.

12 Wait 5 seconds.

13 For vehicles fitted with Telematics, disable the

Service mode. Refer to Section 12K Telematics.

14 Bulb re-learn is now complete. Turn the engine OFF

and release the brake pedal.

Figure 12J – 49

Body Control Module Page 12J–225

Page 12J–225

7 Torque Wrench Specifications

Body Control Module Retaining Screw........................................0.1 – 0.3 Nm

Remote Coded Key Housing Screw Torque Specification...........0.7 – 0.9 Nm

Body Control Module Page 12J–226

Page 12J–226

8 Special Tools

Tool Number Illustration Description Tool Classification

7000086I

Tech 2

Diagnostic Scan Tool

Used for diagnosis of vehicle electrical

system.

Previously released.

Mandatory

J35616-A

(KM609)

Connector Test Adaptor Kit

Used when carrying out electrical

diagnostic circuit checks.

Previously released.

Desirable

3588

(J39200)

Digital Multimeter

Must have at least 10 MΩ input

impedance and be capable of reading

frequencies.

Previously released.

Available